diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Demos/Device')
130 files changed, 43487 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aed850ae3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>AudioInput</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:03:00</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:03:28</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:03:00</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile>AudioInput.elf</ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM></COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>AudioInput.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>AudioInput.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>AudioInput.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><ProjectFiles><Files><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\AudioInput.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\Descriptors.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\AudioInput.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\Descriptors.c</Name></Files></ProjectFiles><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.c b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f41306f3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.c @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the Audio Input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioInput.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA AudioIn App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: USB_Audio_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ LEDs_Init();
+ ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
+ ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
+
+ /* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
+ ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and
+ * configures the sample update and PWM timers.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+
+ /* Sample reload timer initialization */
+ OCR0A = (F_CPU / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY);
+ TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode
+ TCCR0B = (1 << CS00); // Fcpu speed
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop the sample reload timer */
+ TCCR0B = 0;
+
+ /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup audio stream endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific
+ * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ /* Process General and Audio specific control requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_SetInterface:
+ /* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */
+ if (wValue)
+ {
+ /* Start audio task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_RUN);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Stop audio task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ }
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the AudioInput_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in ADC samples from the microphone, and them to the host. */
+TASK(USB_Audio_Task)
+{
+ /* Select the audio stream endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and that the next sample should be stored */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)))
+ {
+ /* Clear the sample reload timer */
+ TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
+
+ /* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
+ int16_t AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
+
+#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
+ /* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
+ AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2));
+#endif
+
+ /* Write the sample to the buffer */
+ Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(AudioSample);
+
+ /* Check to see if the bank is now full */
+ if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
+ {
+ /* Send the full packet to the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.h b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..02c838039 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.h @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ADC.h> // ADC driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** ADC channel number for the microphone input. */
+ #define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL 2
+
+ /** Maximum ADC sample value for the microphone input. */
+ #define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE 0xFFFF
+
+ /** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
+ #define ADC_MAX_RANGE 0x3FF
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum AudioInput_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Task Definitions: */
+ TASK(USB_Audio_Task);
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36e71e975 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Audio Class</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification</td>
+ * <td>USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification</td>
+ * <td>USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the
+ * basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ * required).
+ *
+ * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ * as a USB microphone. Incomming audio from the ADC channel 1 will
+ * be sampled and sent to the host computer.
+ *
+ * To use, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 2.
+ *
+ * Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ * to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a3e42883 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+ Class: 0x00,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2047,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ AudioControlInterface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 0,
+
+ Class: 0x01,
+ SubClass: 0x01,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioControlInterface_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header,
+
+ ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+ TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t) +
+ sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t) +
+ sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t)),
+
+ InCollection: 1,
+ InterfaceNumbers: {1},
+ },
+
+ InputTerminal:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
+
+ TerminalID: 0x01,
+ TerminalType: TERMINAL_IN_MIC,
+ AssociatedOutputTerminal: 0x00,
+
+ TotalChannels: 1,
+ ChannelConfig: 0,
+
+ ChannelStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+ TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ OutputTerminal:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
+
+ TerminalID: 0x02,
+ TerminalType: TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+ AssociatedInputTerminal: 0x00,
+
+ SourceID: 0x01,
+
+ TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioStreamInterface_Alt0:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 0,
+
+ Class: 0x01,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioStreamInterface_Alt1:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 1,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x01,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioStreamInterface_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+ TerminalLink: 0x02,
+
+ FrameDelay: 1,
+ AudioFormat: 0x0001
+ },
+
+ AudioFormat:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioFormat_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Format,
+
+ FormatType: 0x01,
+ Channels: 0x01,
+
+ SubFrameSize: 0x02,
+ BitResolution: 16,
+ SampleFrequencyType: (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) / sizeof(AudioSampleFreq_t)),
+
+ SampleFrequencies: {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
+ },
+
+ AudioEndpoint:
+ {
+ Endpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+ EndpointSize: AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 1
+ },
+
+ Refresh: 0,
+ SyncEndpointNumber: 0
+ },
+
+ AudioEndpoint_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+ Attributes: 0x00,
+
+ LockDelayUnits: 0x00,
+ LockDelay: 0x0000
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA Audio In Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc0074980 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24
+
+ /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal 0x02
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal 0x03
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit 0x06
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_Format 0x02
+
+ //@{
+ /** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+ #define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT (1 << 0)
+ #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT (1 << 1)
+ #define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT (1 << 2)
+ #define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE (1 << 3)
+ #define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND (1 << 4)
+ #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND (1 << 5)
+ #define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER (1 << 6)
+ #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER (1 << 7)
+ #define CHANNEL_SURROUND (1 << 8)
+ #define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT (1 << 9)
+ #define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT (1 << 10)
+ #define CHANNEL_TOP (1 << 11)
+ //@}
+
+ //@{
+ /** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+ #define FEATURE_MUTE (1 << 0)
+ #define FEATURE_VOLUME (1 << 1)
+ #define FEATURE_BASS (1 << 2)
+ #define FEATURE_MID (1 << 3)
+ #define FEATURE_TREBLE (1 << 4)
+ #define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER (1 << 5)
+ #define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN (1 << 6)
+ #define FEATURE_DELAY (1 << 7)
+ #define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST (1 << 8)
+ #define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS (1 << 9)
+ //@}
+
+ //@{
+ /** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+ #define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED 0x0100
+ #define TERMINAL_STREAMING 0x0101
+ #define TERMINAL_VENDOR 0x01FF
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED 0x0200
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC 0x0201
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC 0x0202
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC 0x0203
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC 0x0204
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY 0x0205
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC 0x0206
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED 0x0300
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER 0x0301
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES 0x0302
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED 0x0303
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP 0x0304
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM 0x0305
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION 0x0306
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ 0x0307
+ //@}
+
+ /** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
+ *
+ * \param freq Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
+ */
+ #define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq) {LowWord: ((uint32_t)freq & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0x0000FF)}
+
+ /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+ * accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+ */
+ #define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7)
+
+ /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+ * will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+ */
+ #define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS (0 << 7)
+
+ #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+ /** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+ #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 1
+ #else
+ #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 3
+ #endif
+
+ /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
+ * at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
+ * USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
+ */
+ #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
+
+ /** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
+ #define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY 48000
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+ * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+ * details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint16_t ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+ uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
+
+ uint8_t InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
+ uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */
+ } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
+ * are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
+ * specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+ uint8_t SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */
+
+ uint8_t ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */
+ uint8_t ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each seperate audio channel */
+
+ uint8_t FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+ } USB_AudioFeatureUnit_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+ * contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+ * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+ uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+ uint8_t AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+ * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+ */
+ uint8_t TotalChannels; /**< Total number of seperate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
+ uint16_t ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */
+
+ uint8_t ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */
+ uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+ } USB_AudioInputTerminal_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+ * contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+ * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+ uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+ uint8_t AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+ * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+ */
+ uint8_t SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */
+
+ uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+ } USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+ * how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */
+
+ uint8_t FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */
+ uint16_t AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+ } USB_AudioInterface_AS_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype,
+ * this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint16_t LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */
+ uint8_t HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */
+ } AudioSampleFreq_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
+ * about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
+ * in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+ uint8_t Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */
+
+ uint8_t SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */
+ uint8_t BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */
+
+ uint8_t SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */
+ AudioSampleFreq_t SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */
+ } USB_AudioFormat_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint
+ * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
+
+ uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
+ uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
+ } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+ * on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+ * class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */
+
+ uint8_t LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */
+ uint16_t LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */
+ } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface;
+ USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC;
+ USB_AudioInputTerminal_t InputTerminal;
+ USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t OutputTerminal;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt0;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt1;
+ USB_AudioInterface_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC;
+ USB_AudioFormat_t AudioFormat;
+ USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t AudioEndpoint;
+ USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t AudioEndpoint_SPC;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f84efb7ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioInput/makefile b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95297d798 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioInput/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = AudioInput
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a01ba8f1a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>AudioOutput</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:03:51</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:04:06</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:03:51</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioOutput\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM></COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>AudioOutput.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>AudioOutput.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>AudioOutput.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f390f001 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c @@ -0,0 +1,299 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the Audio Output demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioOutput.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA AudioOut App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: USB_Audio_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ LEDs_Init();
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and
+ * configures the sample update and PWM timers.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+
+ /* Sample reload timer initialization */
+ OCR0A = (F_CPU / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY);
+ TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode
+ TCCR0B = (1 << CS00); // Fcpu speed
+
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+ /* Set speaker as output */
+ DDRC |= (1 << 6);
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+ /* Set speakers as outputs */
+ DDRC |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+ /* Set PORTC as outputs */
+ DDRC |= 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+ /* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+ TCCRxA = ((1 << WGMx0) | (1 << COMxA1) | (1 << COMxA0)
+ | (1 << COMxB1) | (1 << COMxB0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+ TCCRxB = ((1 << WGMx2) | (1 << CSx0)); // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
+#endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop the timers */
+ TCCR0B = 0;
+#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+ TCCRxB = 0;
+#endif
+
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+ /* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
+ DDRC &= ~(1 << 6);
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+ /* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */
+ DDRC &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+ /* Set PORTC low */
+ PORTC = 0x00;
+#endif
+
+ /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup audio stream endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific
+ * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ /* Process General and Audio specific control requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_SetInterface:
+ /* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */
+ if (wValue)
+ {
+ /* Start audio task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_RUN);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Stop audio task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ }
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the AudioOutput_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in audio samples from the host, and outputting them to the speakers/LEDs as
+ * desired.
+ */
+TASK(USB_Audio_Task)
+{
+ /* Select the audio stream endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and that the next sample should be read */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)))
+ {
+ /* Clear the sample reload timer */
+ TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A);
+
+ /* Retreive the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples */
+ int16_t LeftSample_16Bit = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+ int16_t RightSample_16Bit = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ /* Check to see if the bank is now empty */
+ if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
+ {
+ /* Acknowledge the packet, clear the bank ready for the next packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+
+ /* Massage signed 16-bit left and right audio samples into signed 8-bit */
+ int8_t LeftSample_8Bit = (LeftSample_16Bit >> 8);
+ int8_t RightSample_8Bit = (RightSample_16Bit >> 8);
+
+#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+ /* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */
+ int8_t MixedSample_8Bit = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1);
+
+ /* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
+ OCRxA = ((uint8_t)MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+ /* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */
+ OCRxA = ((uint8_t)LeftSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+ OCRxB = ((uint8_t)RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+ /* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */
+ int8_t MixedSample_8Bit = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1);
+
+ PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit;
+#else
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Make left channel positive (absolute) */
+ if (LeftSample_8Bit < 0)
+ LeftSample_8Bit = -LeftSample_8Bit;
+
+ /* Make right channel positive (absolute) */
+ if (RightSample_8Bit < 0)
+ RightSample_8Bit = -RightSample_8Bit;
+
+ /* Set first LED based on sample value */
+ if (LeftSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 1))
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+ else if (LeftSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 3))
+ LEDMask |= (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ else
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+ /* Set second LED based on sample value */
+ if (RightSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 1))
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+ else if (RightSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 3))
+ LEDMask |= (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
+ else
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+#endif
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0ad9e5bf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER)
+ #define TCCRxA TCCR3A
+ #define TCCRxB TCCR3B
+ #define OCRxA OCR3A
+ #define OCRxB OCR3B
+ #define WGMx0 WGM30
+ #define WGMx2 WGM32
+ #define COMxA1 COM3A1
+ #define COMxA0 COM3A0
+ #define COMxB1 COM3B1
+ #define COMxB0 COM3B0
+ #define CSx0 CS30
+ #else
+ /** Timer count register used for left channel PWM audio output (or mixed output in mono output mode) */
+ #define TCCRxA TCCR1A
+
+ /** Timer count register used for right channel PWM audio output */
+ #define TCCRxB TCCR1B
+
+ /** Timer compare register used for left channel PWM audio output (or mixed output in mono output mode) */
+ #define OCRxA OCR1A
+
+ /** Timer compare register used for right channel PWM audio output */
+ #define OCRxB OCR1B
+
+ /** Timer control register mask used to select PWM mode */
+ #define WGMx0 WGM10
+
+ /** Timer control register mask used to select PWM mode */
+ #define WGMx2 WGM12
+
+ /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */
+ #define COMxA1 COM1A1
+
+ /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */
+ #define COMxA0 COM1A0
+
+ /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */
+ #define COMxB1 COM1B1
+
+ /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */
+ #define COMxB0 COM1B0
+
+ /** Timer control register mask used to start the timer at Fcpu clock rate */
+ #define CSx0 CS10
+ #endif
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum AudioOutput_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Task Definitions: */
+ TASK(USB_Audio_Task);
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0638c47f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Audio Class</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification</td>
+ * <td>USBIF Audio Class Terminal Types Specification</td>
+ * <td>USBIF Audio Data Formats Specification</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the
+ * basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ * required).
+ *
+ * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ * as a USB speaker. Incomming audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto
+ * the timer output (timer 3 for the AT90USBXXX6/7 USB AVRs, timer 1 for
+ * the AT90USBXXX2 controller AVRs) compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO
+ * mode, on channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on the board LEDs
+ * for AUDIO_OUT_LEDS mode. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and
+ * attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *
+ * Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ * to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>AUDIO_OUT_STEREO</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in stereo to the timer output pins of the microcontroller.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>AUDIO_OUT_MONO</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to the timer output pin of the microcontroller.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>AUDIO_OUT_LEDS</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in stereo to the board LEDs.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>AUDIO_OUT_PORTC</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to port C of the microcontroller, for connection to an
+ * external DAC.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..169e534ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(02.00),
+ Class: 0x00,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2046,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ AudioControlInterface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 0,
+
+ Class: 0x01,
+ SubClass: 0x01,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioControlInterface_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header,
+
+ ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+ TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t) +
+ sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t) +
+ sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t)),
+
+ InCollection: 1,
+ InterfaceNumbers: {1},
+ },
+
+ InputTerminal:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal,
+
+ TerminalID: 0x01,
+ TerminalType: TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+ AssociatedOutputTerminal: 0x00,
+
+ TotalChannels: 2,
+ ChannelConfig: (CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT),
+
+ ChannelStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+ TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ OutputTerminal:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal,
+
+ TerminalID: 0x02,
+ TerminalType: TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER,
+ AssociatedInputTerminal: 0x00,
+
+ SourceID: 0x01,
+
+ TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioStreamInterface_Alt0:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 0,
+
+ Class: 0x01,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioStreamInterface_Alt1:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 1,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x01,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioStreamInterface_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+ TerminalLink: 0x01,
+
+ FrameDelay: 1,
+ AudioFormat: 0x0001
+ },
+
+ AudioFormat:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioFormat_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Format,
+
+ FormatType: 0x01,
+ Channels: 0x02,
+
+ SubFrameSize: 0x02,
+ BitResolution: 16,
+
+ SampleFrequencyType: (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) / sizeof(AudioSampleFreq_t)),
+ SampleFrequencies: {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)}
+ },
+
+ AudioEndpoint:
+ {
+ Endpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+ EndpointSize: AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 1
+ },
+
+ Refresh: 0,
+ SyncEndpointNumber: 0
+ },
+
+ AudioEndpoint_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+ Attributes: EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS,
+
+ LockDelayUnits: 0x00,
+ LockDelay: 0x0000
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA Audio Out Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99f10d648 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24
+
+ /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal 0x02
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal 0x03
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit 0x06
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_Format 0x02
+
+ //@{
+ /** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+ #define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT (1 << 0)
+ #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT (1 << 1)
+ #define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT (1 << 2)
+ #define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE (1 << 3)
+ #define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND (1 << 4)
+ #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND (1 << 5)
+ #define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER (1 << 6)
+ #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER (1 << 7)
+ #define CHANNEL_SURROUND (1 << 8)
+ #define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT (1 << 9)
+ #define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT (1 << 10)
+ #define CHANNEL_TOP (1 << 11)
+ //@}
+
+ //@{
+ /** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+ #define FEATURE_MUTE (1 << 0)
+ #define FEATURE_VOLUME (1 << 1)
+ #define FEATURE_BASS (1 << 2)
+ #define FEATURE_MID (1 << 3)
+ #define FEATURE_TREBLE (1 << 4)
+ #define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER (1 << 5)
+ #define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN (1 << 6)
+ #define FEATURE_DELAY (1 << 7)
+ #define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST (1 << 8)
+ #define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS (1 << 9)
+ //@}
+
+ //@{
+ /** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+
+ #define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED 0x0100
+ #define TERMINAL_STREAMING 0x0101
+ #define TERMINAL_VENDOR 0x01FF
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED 0x0200
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC 0x0201
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC 0x0202
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC 0x0203
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC 0x0204
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY 0x0205
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC 0x0206
+ #define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED 0x0300
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER 0x0301
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES 0x0302
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED 0x0303
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP 0x0304
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM 0x0305
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION 0x0306
+ #define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ 0x0307
+ //@}
+
+ /** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
+ *
+ * \param freq Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
+ */
+ #define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq) {LowWord: ((uint32_t)freq & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0x0000FF)}
+
+ /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+ * accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+ */
+ #define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7)
+
+ /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+ * will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+ */
+ #define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS (0 << 7)
+
+ #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+ /** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+ #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 1
+ #else
+ #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 3
+ #endif
+
+ /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires
+ * at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller
+ * USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output.
+ */
+ #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM)
+
+ /** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */
+ #define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY 48000
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+ * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+ * details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint16_t ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+ uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
+
+ uint8_t InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
+ uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */
+ } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
+ * are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
+ * specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+ uint8_t SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */
+
+ uint8_t ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */
+ uint8_t ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each seperate audio channel */
+
+ uint8_t FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+ } USB_AudioFeatureUnit_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+ * contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+ * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+ uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+ uint8_t AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+ * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+ */
+ uint8_t TotalChannels; /**< Total number of seperate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
+ uint16_t ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */
+
+ uint8_t ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */
+ uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+ } USB_AudioInputTerminal_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+ * contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+ * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */
+ uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */
+ uint8_t AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+ * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset
+ */
+ uint8_t SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */
+
+ uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+ } USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+ * how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */
+
+ uint8_t FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */
+ uint16_t AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+ } USB_AudioInterface_AS_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype,
+ * this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint16_t LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */
+ uint8_t HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */
+ } AudioSampleFreq_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
+ * about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
+ * in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */
+ uint8_t Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */
+
+ uint8_t SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */
+ uint8_t BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */
+
+ uint8_t SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */
+ AudioSampleFreq_t SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */
+ } USB_AudioFormat_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint
+ * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
+
+ uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
+ uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
+ } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+ * on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+ * class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */
+
+ uint8_t LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */
+ uint16_t LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */
+ } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface;
+ USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC;
+ USB_AudioInputTerminal_t InputTerminal;
+ USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t OutputTerminal;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt0;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt1;
+ USB_AudioInterface_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC;
+ USB_AudioFormat_t AudioFormat;
+ USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t AudioEndpoint;
+ USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t AudioEndpoint_SPC;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..114137e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = YES
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/makefile b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ecd9009c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/AudioOutput/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = AudioOutput
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+CDEFS += -DAUDIO_OUT_STEREO
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.aps b/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83dde595d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>CDC</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:04:34</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:04:56</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:04:34</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\CDC\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>CDC.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>CDC.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>CDC.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.c b/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e933d581 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,319 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the CDC demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "CDC.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA CDC App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: CDC_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/* Globals: */
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600,
+ CharFormat: OneStopBit,
+ ParityType: Parity_None,
+ DataBits: 8 };
+
+/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed upwards. */
+char JoystickUpString[] = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+
+/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed downwards. */
+char JoystickDownString[] = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+
+/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed left. */
+char JoystickLeftString[] = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+
+/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed right. */
+char JoystickRightString[] = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+
+/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed inwards. */
+char JoystickPressedString[] = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ Joystick_Init();
+ LEDs_Init();
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ /* Start CDC task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands,
+ * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding;
+
+ /* Process CDC specific control requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+ Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetControlLineState:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+#if 0
+ /* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake
+ lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter, and can be masked against the CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks
+ to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code:
+ */
+
+ uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ // Do something with the given line states in wIndex
+#endif
+
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the CDC_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */
+TASK(CDC_Task)
+{
+ char* ReportString = NULL;
+ uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+ static bool ActionSent = false;
+
+#if 0
+ /* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232
+ handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code:
+ */
+ USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t)
+ {
+ NotificationType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ Notification: NOTIF_SerialState,
+ wValue: 0,
+ wIndex: 0,
+ wLength: sizeof(uint16_t),
+ };
+
+ uint16_t LineStateMask;
+
+ // Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host
+
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM);
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification));
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask));
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+#endif
+
+ /* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+ ReportString = JoystickUpString;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+ ReportString = JoystickDownString;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+ ReportString = JoystickLeftString;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+ ReportString = JoystickRightString;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+ ReportString = JoystickPressedString;
+
+ /* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */
+ if (ReportString == NULL)
+ {
+ ActionSent = false;
+ }
+ else if (ActionSent == false)
+ {
+ ActionSent = true;
+
+ /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Write the String to the Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+
+ /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Throw away any received data from the host */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.h b/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d953303f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for CDC.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CDC_H_
+#define _CDC_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> // Joystick driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+ #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21
+
+ /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+ #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20
+
+ /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
+ #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22
+
+ /** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for
+ * use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC
+ * notification endpoint.
+ */
+ #define NOTIF_SerialState 0x20
+
+ /** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+ * from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR (1 << 0)
+
+ /** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+ * from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS (1 << 1)
+
+ /** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+ * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD (1 << 0)
+
+ /** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+ * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR (1 << 1)
+
+ /** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+ * from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK (1 << 2)
+
+ /** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+ * from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING (1 << 3)
+
+ /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+ * to indicate that a framing error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR (1 << 4)
+
+ /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+ * to indicate that a parity error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR (1 << 5)
+
+ /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+ * to indicate that a data overrun error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration
+ * as set by the host via a class specific request.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
+ uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+ * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
+ */
+ uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+ * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
+ */
+ uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */
+ } CDC_Line_Coding_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a
+ * change in the device state asynchronously.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants
+ * from the library StdRequestType.h header
+ */
+ uint8_t Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */
+ uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */
+ uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */
+ uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */
+ } USB_Notification_Header_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
+ enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
+ {
+ OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
+ OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
+ TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
+ enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t
+ {
+ Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum CDC_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Tasks: */
+ TASK(CDC_Task);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.txt b/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e13b55b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/CDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Communications Device Class Device (Virtual Serial Port)
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ * This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ * a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick
+ * actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device
+ * does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
+ *
+ * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ * project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ * CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/CDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fa0c79da0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2044,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ CCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_IntHeader:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x00,
+
+ Data: {0x01, 0x10}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_CallManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x01,
+
+ Data: {0x03, 0x01}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x02,
+
+ Data: {0x06}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_Union:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x06,
+
+ Data: {0x00, 0x01}
+ },
+
+ ManagementEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF
+ },
+
+ DCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x0A,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ DataOutEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ },
+
+ DataInEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(13), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/CDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bec5e40d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+ * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+ * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+ * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+ *
+ * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+ */
+ #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \
+ struct \
+ { \
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \
+ uint8_t SubType; \
+ uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \
+ }
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 2
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 3
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 4
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+ #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/CDC/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3493347c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf b/Demos/Device/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9d9ed63a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA CDC Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%COMPANY%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME% = ManufName
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[ManufName]
+%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; Windows 2000/XP Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[Modem3.nt]
+CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg
+
+[USBModemCopyFileSection]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[Modem3.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[Modem3.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService
+
+[DriverService]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[Strings]
+COMPANY="LUFA Library"
+MFGNAME="Dean Camera"
+Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port"
+SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/CDC/makefile b/Demos/Device/CDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f27fb926 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/CDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = CDC
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f74b138b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,385 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0xEF,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x204E,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 4,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ IAD1:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), Type: DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+ FirstInterfaceIndex: 0,
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ IADStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC1_CCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC1_Functional_IntHeader:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x00,
+
+ Data: {0x01, 0x10}
+ },
+
+ CDC1_Functional_CallManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x01,
+
+ Data: {0x03, 0x01}
+ },
+
+ CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x02,
+
+ Data: {0x06}
+ },
+
+ CDC1_Functional_Union:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x06,
+
+ Data: {0x00, 0x01}
+ },
+
+ CDC1_ManagementEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF
+ },
+
+ CDC1_DCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x0A,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC1_DataOutEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC1_RX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ },
+
+ CDC1_DataInEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_TX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ },
+
+ IAD2:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), Type: DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+ FirstInterfaceIndex: 2,
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ IADStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC2_CCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 2,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC2_Functional_IntHeader:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x00,
+
+ Data: {0x01, 0x10}
+ },
+
+ CDC2_Functional_CallManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x01,
+
+ Data: {0x03, 0x03}
+ },
+
+ CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x02,
+
+ Data: {0x06}
+ },
+
+ CDC2_Functional_Union:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x06,
+
+ Data: {0x02, 0x03}
+ },
+
+ CDC2_ManagementEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF
+ },
+
+ CDC2_DCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 3,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x0A,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC2_DataOutEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC2_RX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ },
+
+ CDC2_DataInEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_TX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(13), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bbe52fe3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+ * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+ * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+ * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+ *
+ * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+ */
+ #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \
+ struct \
+ { \
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \
+ uint8_t SubType; \
+ uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \
+ }
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC1_TX_EPNUM 1
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+ #define CDC1_RX_EPNUM 2
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 4
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC2_TX_EPNUM 5
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+ #define CDC2_RX_EPNUM 6
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */
+ #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+ #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t IAD1;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC1_CCI_Interface;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_IntHeader;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_CallManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_Union;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_ManagementEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC1_DCI_Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_DataOutEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_DataInEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t IAD2;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC2_CCI_Interface;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_IntHeader;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_CallManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_Union;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_ManagementEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC2_DCI_Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_DataOutEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_DataInEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b3b74176 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Dual CDC Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..276e74356 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>DualCDC</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:06:03</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:06:18</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:06:03</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\DualCDC\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>DualCDC.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>DualCDC.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>DualCDC.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.c b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c598da42 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,359 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the DualCDC demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "DualCDC.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA DualCDC App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: CDC1_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: CDC2_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/* Globals: */
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding1 = { BaudRateBPS: 9600,
+ CharFormat: OneStopBit,
+ ParityType: Parity_None,
+ DataBits: 8 };
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the second virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding2 = { BaudRateBPS: 9600,
+ CharFormat: OneStopBit,
+ ParityType: Parity_None,
+ DataBits: 8 };
+
+/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed upwards. */
+char JoystickUpString[] = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+
+/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed downwards. */
+char JoystickDownString[] = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+
+/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed left. */
+char JoystickLeftString[] = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+
+/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed right. */
+char JoystickRightString[] = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+
+/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed inwards. */
+char JoystickPressedString[] = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ Joystick_Init();
+ LEDs_Init();
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC1_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC2_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management tasks are started.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the first CDC */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the second CDC */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ /* Start CDC tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC1_Task, TASK_RUN);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC2_Task, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands,
+ * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ uint8_t* LineCodingData;
+
+ /* Discard the unused wValue parameter */
+ Endpoint_Ignore_Word();
+
+ /* wIndex indicates the interface being controlled */
+ uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ /* Determine which interface's Line Coding data is being set from the wIndex parameter */
+ LineCodingData = (wIndex == 0) ? (uint8_t*)&LineCoding1 : (uint8_t*)&LineCoding2;
+
+ /* Process CDC specific control requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+ Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetControlLineState:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the DualCDC_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the first CDC interface, which sends joystick
+ * movements to the host as ASCII strings.
+ */
+TASK(CDC1_Task)
+{
+ char* ReportString = NULL;
+ uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+ static bool ActionSent = false;
+
+ /* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+ ReportString = JoystickUpString;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+ ReportString = JoystickDownString;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+ ReportString = JoystickLeftString;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+ ReportString = JoystickRightString;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+ ReportString = JoystickPressedString;
+
+ /* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */
+ if (ReportString == NULL)
+ {
+ ActionSent = false;
+ }
+ else if (ActionSent == false)
+ {
+ ActionSent = true;
+
+ /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Write the String to the Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+
+ /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Throw away any received data from the host */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the second CDC interface, which echos back
+ * all data sent to it from the host.
+ */
+TASK(CDC2_Task)
+{
+ /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check to see if any data has been received */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Create a temp buffer big enough to hold the incomming endpoint packet */
+ uint8_t Buffer[Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()];
+
+ /* Remember how large the incomming packet is */
+ uint16_t DataLength = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+
+ /* Read in the incomming packet into the buffer */
+ Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Write the received data to the endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.h b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4c62abf9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for DualCDC.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DUAL_CDC_H_
+#define _DUAL_CDC_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> // Joystick driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+ #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21
+
+ /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+ #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20
+
+ /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
+ #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration
+ * as set by the host via a class specific request.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
+ uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+ * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
+ */
+ uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+ * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
+ */
+ uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */
+ } CDC_Line_Coding_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
+ enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
+ {
+ OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
+ OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
+ TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
+ enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t
+ {
+ Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum DualCDC_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Tasks: */
+ TASK(CDC1_Task);
+ TASK(CDC2_Task);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e086029b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class Device (Dual Virtual Serial Port)
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Miscellaneous Device Class</td>
+ * <td>( Sub-Interface: Communications Device Class (CDC) )</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Common Class</td>
+ * <td>( Sub-Interface: Abstract Control Model (ACM) )</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECN</td>
+ * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ * This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ * a compound device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair
+ * of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association
+ * Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC
+ * descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be
+ * supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is
+ * XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function).
+ *
+ * Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings
+ * through the first serial port. The device does not respond to
+ * serial data sent from the host in the first serial port.
+ *
+ * The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host.
+ *
+ * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ * project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ * CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10ba560f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +; Windows LUFA Dual CDC Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%COMPANY%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME% = ManufName
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[ManufName]
+%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00
+%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; Windows 2000/XP Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[Modem3.nt]
+CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg
+
+[USBModemCopyFileSection]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[Modem3.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[Modem3.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService
+
+[DriverService]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[Strings]
+COMPANY="LUFA Library"
+MFGNAME="Dean Camera"
+Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port"
+SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/DualCDC/makefile b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2a8d9e04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/DualCDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = DualCDC
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/Joystick/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36e644c26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ * more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] =
+{
+ 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */
+ 0x09, 0x04, /* Usage (Joystick) */
+ 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */
+ 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */
+ 0xa1, 0x00, /* Collection (Physical) */
+ 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */
+ 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage (X) */
+ 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage (Y) */
+ 0x15, 0x9c, /* Logical Minimum (-100) */
+ 0x25, 0x64, /* Logical Maximum (100) */
+ 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */
+ 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */
+ 0x81, 0x82, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute, Volatile) */
+ 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */
+ 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Button 2) */
+ 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Button 1) */
+ 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */
+ 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */
+ 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */
+ 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */
+ 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x75, 0x06, /* Report Size (6) */
+ 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */
+ 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */
+ 0xc0, /* End Collection */
+ 0xc0 /* End Collection */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x00,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2043,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 1,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0x00,
+ AlternateSetting: 0x00,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x03,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ JoystickHID:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID},
+
+ HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+ CountryCode: 0x00,
+ TotalHIDReports: 0x01,
+ HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report,
+ HIDReportLength: sizeof(JoystickReport)
+ },
+
+ JoystickEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | JOYSTICK_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x02
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA Joystick Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_HID:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.JoystickHID);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Report:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(JoystickReport);
+ Size = sizeof(JoystickReport);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Joystick/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3463d9623 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+ * specification for details on the structure elements.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+
+ uint16_t HIDSpec;
+ uint8_t CountryCode;
+
+ uint8_t TotalHIDReports;
+
+ uint8_t HIDReportType;
+ uint16_t HIDReportLength;
+ } USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+ typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_HID_t JoystickHID;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t JoystickEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Endpoint number of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+ #define JOYSTICK_EPNUM 1
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+ #define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE 8
+
+ /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_HID 0x21
+
+ /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_Report 0x22
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Joystick/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2af5ce68e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.aps b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..245245daa --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>Joystick</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:06:38</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:07:27</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:06:38</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Joystick\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET>JTAGICE mkII</CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART>AT90USB1287.xml</CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Joystick.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Joystick.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>at90usb1287</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>Joystick.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.c b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd8822705 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.c @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Joystick.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Joystick App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: USB_Joystick_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ Joystick_Init();
+ LEDs_Init();
+ HWB_Init();
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and joystick reporting tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running joystick reporting and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Joystick_Report, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the joystick reporting task started.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup Joystick Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ /* Start joystick reporting task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Joystick_Report, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ /* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_GetReport:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData;
+
+ /* Create the next HID report to send to the host */
+ GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData);
+
+ /* Ignore report type and ID number value */
+ Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+ /* Ignore unused Interface number value */
+ Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+ /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */
+ uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */
+ if (wLength > sizeof(JoystickReportData))
+ wLength = sizeof(JoystickReportData);
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, wLength);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise
+ */
+bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData)
+{
+ static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0;
+ uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+ bool InputChanged = false;
+
+ /* Clear the report contents */
+ memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t));
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+ ReportData->Y = -100;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+ ReportData->Y = 100;
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+ ReportData->X = 100;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+ ReportData->X = -100;
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+ ReportData->Button = (1 << 1);
+
+ if (HWB_GetStatus())
+ ReportData->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+ /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */
+ InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL);
+
+ /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */
+ PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL;
+
+ /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */
+ return InputChanged;
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the Joystick_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host. */
+TASK(USB_Joystick_Report)
+{
+ /* Check if the USB System is connected to a Host */
+ if (USB_IsConnected)
+ {
+ /* Select the Joystick Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if Joystick Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData;
+
+ /* Create the next HID report to send to the host */
+ GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData);
+
+ /* Write Joystick Report Data */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Clear the report data afterwards */
+ JoystickReportData.X = 0;
+ JoystickReportData.Y = 0;
+ JoystickReportData.Button = 0;
+ }
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.h b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79c7e498f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.h @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Joystick.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> // Joystick driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h> // Hardware Button driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Task Definitions: */
+ TASK(USB_Joystick_Report);
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+ #define REQ_GetReport 0x01
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+ * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ int8_t X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+ int8_t Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+ uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */
+ } USB_JoystickReport_Data_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum Joystick_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData);
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.txt b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d47ae92f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Joystick/Joystick.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks
+ * using the standard Keyboard HID profile.
+ *
+ * This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons.
+ * Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button
+ * is the second.
+ *
+ * Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on
+ * the host computer.
+ *
+ * Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/Joystick/makefile b/Demos/Device/Joystick/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c645747d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Joystick/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Joystick
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1f383ab08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+ Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ * more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+ 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */
+ 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */
+ 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */
+ 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */
+ 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */
+ 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */
+ 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */
+ 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */
+ 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */
+ 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */
+ 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */
+ 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */
+ 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */
+ 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */
+ 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */
+ 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */
+ 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */
+ 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */
+ 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */
+ 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */
+ 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */
+ 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */
+ 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */
+ 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */
+ 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+ 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */
+ 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */
+ 0xc0 /* End Collection */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x00,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2042,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 1,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0x00,
+ AlternateSetting: 0x00,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x03,
+ SubClass: 0x01,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ KeyboardHID:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID},
+
+ HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+ CountryCode: 0x00,
+ TotalHIDReports: 0x01,
+ HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report,
+ HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+ },
+
+ KeyboardEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x04
+ },
+
+ KeyboardLEDsEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x04
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(16), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Denver Gingerich"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA Keyboard Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_HID:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Report:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport);
+ Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa1bf05b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+ Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+ * specification for details on the structure elements.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+
+ uint16_t HIDSpec;
+ uint8_t CountryCode;
+
+ uint8_t TotalHIDReports;
+
+ uint8_t HIDReportType;
+ uint16_t HIDReportLength;
+ } USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+ typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardLEDsEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+ #define KEYBOARD_EPNUM 1
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
+ #define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM 2
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */
+ #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8
+
+ /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_HID 0x21
+
+ /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_Report 0x22
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79a300aed --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..541c17503 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>Keyboard</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 13:59:29</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:00:25</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 13:59:29</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile>Keyboard.elf</ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Keyboard\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET>JTAGICE mkII</CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART>AT90USB1287.xml</CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Keyboard.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Keyboard.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>at90usb1287</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>Keyboard.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files><File00000><FileId>00000</FileId><FileName>makefile</FileName><Status>1</Status></File00000></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.c b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d6b254ffb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.c @@ -0,0 +1,548 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+ Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the KeyboardFullInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Keyboard.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Keyboard App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ #endif
+
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ { Task: USB_Keyboard_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ #endif
+};
+
+/* Global Variables */
+/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot
+ * protocol reporting mode.
+ */
+bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
+
+/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports
+ * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse).
+ */
+uint8_t IdleCount = 0;
+
+/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle
+ * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request
+ * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved.
+ */
+uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ Joystick_Init();
+ LEDs_Init();
+
+ /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */
+ OCR0A = 0x7D;
+ TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+ TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
+ TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+ #endif
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+
+ /* Default to report protocol on connect */
+ UsingReportProtocol = true;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the
+ * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled
+ * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset)
+{
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Select the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+ /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */
+ USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP);
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running keyboard reporting and USB management tasks */
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_STOP);
+ #endif
+
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+ #endif
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard device endpoints.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */
+ USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN);
+ #endif
+
+ /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Enable the endpoint OUT interrupt ISR for the LED report endpoint */
+ USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT);
+ #endif
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Start running keyboard reporting task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_RUN);
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ /* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_GetReport:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+
+ /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
+ CreateKeyboardReport(&KeyboardReportData);
+
+ /* Ignore report type and ID number value */
+ Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+ /* Ignore unused Interface number value */
+ Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+ /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */
+ uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */
+ if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData))
+ wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData);
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetReport:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
+
+ /* Read in the LED report from the host */
+ uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+
+ /* Process the incomming LED report */
+ ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus);
+
+ /* Clear the endpoint data */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_GetProtocol:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol);
+
+ /* Send the flag to the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetProtocol:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */
+ uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
+ UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000);
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetIdle:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */
+ uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Get idle period in MSB */
+ IdleCount = (wValue >> 8);
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_GetIdle:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the current idle duration to the host */
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount);
+
+ /* Send the flag to the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the
+ * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period.
+ */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+ /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
+ if (IdleMSRemaining)
+ IdleMSRemaining--;
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ */
+void CreateKeyboardReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData)
+{
+ uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+
+ /* Clear the report contents */
+ memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t));
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+ ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+ ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+ ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+ ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+ ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E
+}
+
+/** Processes a received LED report, and updates the board LEDs states to match.
+ *
+ * \param LEDReport LED status report from the host
+ */
+void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
+
+ if (LEDReport & 0x01) // NUM Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+ if (LEDReport & 0x02) // CAPS Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+ if (LEDReport & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+ /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Sends the next HID report to the host, via the keyboard data endpoint. */
+static inline void SendNextReport(void)
+{
+ static USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t PrevKeyboardReportData;
+ USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+ bool SendReport = true;
+
+ /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
+ CreateKeyboardReport(&KeyboardReportData);
+
+ /* Check if the idle period is set */
+ if (IdleCount)
+ {
+ /* Check if idle period has elapsed */
+ if (!(IdleMSRemaining))
+ {
+ /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */
+ IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Idle period not elapsed, indicate that a report must not be sent unless the report has changed */
+ SendReport = (memcmp(&PrevKeyboardReportData, &KeyboardReportData, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)) != 0);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Save the current report data for later comparison to check for changes */
+ PrevKeyboardReportData = KeyboardReportData;
+
+ /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write, and if we should send a report */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport)
+ {
+ /* Write Keyboard Report Data */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Reads the next LED status report from the host from the LED data endpoint, if one has been sent. */
+static inline void ReceiveNextReport(void)
+{
+ /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+ if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
+ return;
+
+ /* Read in the LED report from the host */
+ uint8_t LEDReport = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+
+ /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Process the read LED report from the host */
+ ProcessLEDReport(LEDReport);
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardFullInt_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+#if !defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */
+TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report)
+{
+ /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host */
+ if (USB_IsConnected)
+ {
+ /* Send the next keypress report to the host */
+ SendNextReport();
+
+ /* Process the LED report sent from the host */
+ ReceiveNextReport();
+ }
+}
+#endif
+
+/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as
+ * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send
+ * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB
+ * controller. It is also used to respond to standard and class specific requests send to the device on the control
+ * endpoint, by handing them off to the LUFA library when they are received.
+ */
+ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */
+ if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP))
+ {
+ /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */
+ Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+ /* Process the control request */
+ USB_USBTask();
+
+ /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */
+ USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP);
+ }
+ #endif
+
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Check if keyboard endpoint has interrupted */
+ if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_EPNUM))
+ {
+ /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */
+ USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN);
+
+ /* Clear the Keyboard Report endpoint interrupt */
+ Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Send the next keypress report to the host */
+ SendNextReport();
+ }
+
+ /* Check if Keyboard LED status Endpoint has interrupted */
+ if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM))
+ {
+ /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Clear the endpoint OUT interrupt flag */
+ USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT);
+
+ /* Clear the Keyboard LED Report endpoint interrupt */
+ Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Process the LED report sent from the host */
+ ReceiveNextReport();
+ }
+ #endif
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.h b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..143ffc654 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.h @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+ Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Keyboard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/interrupt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdbool.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> // Joystick driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+ #define REQ_GetReport 0x01
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */
+ #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
+ #define REQ_SetReport 0x09
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */
+ #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+ #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+ #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B
+
+ /* Task Definitions: */
+ TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report);
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+ * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */
+ uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */
+ uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */
+ } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum Keyboard_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void CreateKeyboardReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData);
+ void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport);
+ static inline void SendNextReport(void);
+ static inline void ReceiveNextReport(void);
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a09d83507 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ * for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ * OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus
+ * works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
+ * the keyboard example, manipulate the joystick to send the letters
+ * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information
+ * on sending keyboard event and keypresses.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this causes the demo to enable interrupts for the control endpoint,
+ * which services control requests from the host. If not defined, the control endpoint
+ * is serviced via polling using the task scheduler.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this causes the demo to enable interrupts for the data endpoints,
+ * which services incomming LED reports and outgoing key status reports to and from the host.
+ * If not defined, the data endpoints are serviced via polling using the task scheduler.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/Keyboard/makefile b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f738ce08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Keyboard/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,728 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Keyboard
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9d91039b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,354 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+ Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ * more details on HID report descriptors.
+ *
+ * This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+ 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */
+ 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */
+ 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */
+ 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */
+ 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Physical) */
+ 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */
+ 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */
+ 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */
+ 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */
+ 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */
+ 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */
+ 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */
+ 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */
+ 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */
+ 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */
+ 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */
+ 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */
+ 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
+ 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */
+ 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */
+ 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */
+ 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */
+ 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */
+ 0xC0, /* End Collection */
+ 0xC0, /* End Collection */
+};
+
+/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+ 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */
+ 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */
+ 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */
+ 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */
+ 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */
+ 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */
+ 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */
+ 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */
+ 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */
+ 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */
+ 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */
+ 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */
+ 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */
+ 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */
+ 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */
+ 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */
+ 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */
+ 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */
+ 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */
+ 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */
+ 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */
+ 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */
+ 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */
+ 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */
+ 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */
+ 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */
+ 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */
+ 0xC0 /* End Collection */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x00,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x204D,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ KeyboardInterface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0x00,
+ AlternateSetting: 0x00,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x03,
+ SubClass: 0x01,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ KeyboardHID:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID},
+
+ HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+ CountryCode: 0x00,
+ TotalHIDReports: 0x01,
+ HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report,
+ HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+ },
+
+ KeyboardInEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x02
+ },
+
+ KeyboardOutEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x02
+ },
+
+ MouseInterface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0x01,
+ AlternateSetting: 0x00,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x03,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ MouseHID:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID},
+
+ HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+ CountryCode: 0x00,
+ TotalHIDReports: 0x01,
+ HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report,
+ HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport)
+ },
+
+ MouseInEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_IN_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x02
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(28), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_HID:
+ if (!(wIndex))
+ {
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+ }
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Report:
+ if (!(wIndex))
+ {
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport);
+ Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport);
+ Size = sizeof(MouseReport);
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59495425c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+ Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+ * specification for details on the structure elements.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+
+ uint16_t HIDSpec;
+ uint8_t CountryCode;
+
+ uint8_t TotalHIDReports;
+
+ uint8_t HIDReportType;
+ uint16_t HIDReportLength;
+ } USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+ typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t KeyboardInterface;
+ USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardInEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardOutEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t MouseInterface;
+ USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseInEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+ #define KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM 1
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
+ #define KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM 2
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+ #define MOUSE_IN_EPNUM 3
+
+ /** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */
+ #define HID_EPSIZE 8
+
+ /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_HID 0x21
+
+ /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_Report 0x22
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12916856b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb54f1d4d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>KeyboardMouse</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:11:00</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:11:17</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:11:00</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardMouse\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET>JTAGICE mkII</CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART>AT90USB1287.xml</CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>KeyboardMouse.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>KeyboardMouse.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>at90usb1287</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>KeyboardMouse.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ee101b8d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c @@ -0,0 +1,367 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+ Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardMouse.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MouseKBD App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: USB_Mouse , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN },
+ { Task: USB_Keyboard , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN },
+};
+
+/* Global Variables */
+/** Global structure to hold the current keyboard interface HID report, for transmission to the host */
+USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+
+/** Global structure to hold the current mouse interface HID report, for transmission to the host */
+USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ Joystick_Init();
+ LEDs_Init();
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs and stops the USB management task.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running HID reporting and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard and mouse device endpoints.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, HID_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ uint8_t* ReportData;
+ uint8_t ReportSize;
+
+ /* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_GetReport:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ Endpoint_Ignore_Word();
+
+ uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ /* Determine if it is the mouse or the keyboard data that is being requested */
+ if (!(wIndex))
+ {
+ ReportData = (uint8_t*)&KeyboardReportData;
+ ReportSize = sizeof(KeyboardReportData);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ReportData = (uint8_t*)&MouseReportData;
+ ReportSize = sizeof(MouseReportData);
+ }
+
+ /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */
+ uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */
+ if (wLength > ReportSize)
+ wLength = ReportSize;
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, wLength);
+
+ /* Clear the report data afterwards */
+ memset(ReportData, 0, ReportSize);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetReport:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
+
+ /* Read in the LED report from the host */
+ uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
+
+ if (LEDStatus & 0x01) // NUM Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+ if (LEDStatus & 0x02) // CAPS Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+ if (LEDStatus & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+ /* Set the status LEDs to the current HID LED status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+
+ /* Clear the endpoint data */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardMouse_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Keyboard task. This generates the next keyboard HID report for the host, and transmits it via the
+ * keyboard IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data. Additionally, it processes host LED status
+ * reports sent to the device via the keyboard OUT reporting endpoint.
+ */
+TASK(USB_Keyboard)
+{
+ uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+
+ /* Check if HWB is not pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */
+ if (!(HWB_GetStatus()))
+ {
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+ KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+ KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+ KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+ KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+ KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E
+ }
+
+ /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host and report protocol mode is enabled */
+ if (USB_IsConnected)
+ {
+ /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Write Keyboard Report Data */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Clear the report data afterwards */
+ memset(&KeyboardReportData, 0, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+ }
+
+ /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Read in the LED report from the host */
+ uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte();
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
+
+ if (LEDStatus & 0x01) // NUM Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+ if (LEDStatus & 0x02) // CAPS Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+ if (LEDStatus & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+ /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+
+ /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/** Mouse task. This generates the next mouse HID report for the host, and transmits it via the
+ * mouse IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data.
+ */
+TASK(USB_Mouse)
+{
+ uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+
+ /* Check if HWB is pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */
+ if (HWB_GetStatus())
+ {
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+ MouseReportData.Y = 1;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+ MouseReportData.Y = -1;
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+ MouseReportData.X = 1;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+ MouseReportData.X = -1;
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+ MouseReportData.Button = (1 << 0);
+ }
+
+ /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host and report protocol mode is enabled */
+ if (USB_IsConnected)
+ {
+ /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Write Mouse Report Data */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Clear the report data afterwards */
+ memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+ }
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9794159fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+ Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdbool.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> // Joystick driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h> // Hardware Button driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Task Definitions: */
+ TASK(USB_Keyboard);
+ TASK(USB_Mouse);
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum KeyboardMouse_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+ #define REQ_GetReport 0x01
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
+ #define REQ_SetReport 0x09
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+ #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+ #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+ * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */
+ uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */
+ uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */
+ } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+ * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */
+ int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+ int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+ } USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6388e9803 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard
+ * and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes
+ * (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two seperate HID
+ * interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under
+ * compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not
+ * pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters
+ * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information
+ * on sending keyboard event and keypresses.
+ *
+ * When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the
+ * joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a
+ * left-button click.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/makefile b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59d676f09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/KeyboardMouse/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardMouse
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/MIDI/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/MIDI/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dbc1d915 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MIDI/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,325 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x00,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2048,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ AudioControlInterface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 0,
+
+ Class: 0x01,
+ SubClass: 0x01,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioControlInterface_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header,
+
+ ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+ TotalLength: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t),
+
+ InCollection: 1,
+ InterfaceNumbers: {1},
+ },
+
+ AudioStreamInterface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x01,
+ SubClass: 0x03,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ AudioStreamInterface_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+ AudioSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00),
+
+ TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) - offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, AudioStreamInterface_SPC))
+ },
+
+ MIDI_In_Jack_Emb:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
+
+ JackType: JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
+ JackID: 0x01,
+
+ JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ MIDI_In_Jack_Ext:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputJack,
+
+ JackType: JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
+ JackID: 0x02,
+
+ JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
+
+ JackType: JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED,
+ JackID: 0x03,
+
+ NumberOfPins: 1,
+ SourceJackID: {0x02},
+ SourcePinID: {0x01},
+
+ JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputJack,
+
+ JackType: JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL,
+ JackID: 0x04,
+
+ NumberOfPins: 1,
+ SourceJackID: {0x01},
+ SourcePinID: {0x01},
+
+ JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint:
+ {
+ Endpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+ EndpointSize: MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0
+ },
+
+ Refresh: 0,
+ SyncEndpointNumber: 0
+ },
+
+ MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+ TotalEmbeddedJacks: 0x01,
+ AssociatedJackID: {0x01}
+ },
+
+ MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint:
+ {
+ Endpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+ EndpointSize: MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0
+ },
+
+ Refresh: 0,
+ SyncEndpointNumber: 0
+ },
+
+ MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint},
+ Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General,
+
+ TotalEmbeddedJacks: 0x01,
+ AssociatedJackID: {0x03}
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(14), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA MIDI Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MIDI/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/MIDI/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f80e58b20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MIDI/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24
+
+ /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI input jack descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_InputJack 0x02
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI output jack descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_OutputJack 0x03
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */
+ #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */
+ #define JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED 0x01
+
+ /** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */
+ #define JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL 0x02
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+ #define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM 1
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+ #define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM 2
+
+ /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+ #define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE 64
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+ * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+ * details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint16_t ACSpecification; /** Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+ uint16_t TotalLength; /** Total length of the Audio class specific control descriptors, including this descriptor */
+
+ uint8_t InCollection; /** Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */
+ uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /** Interface numbers of each audio interface */
+ } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+ * how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class specific descriptors.
+ * See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint16_t AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */
+ uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */
+ } USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint
+ * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */
+
+ uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */
+ uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */
+ } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either
+ * a physical input jack, or a logical jack (recieving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
+ uint8_t JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
+
+ uint8_t JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+ } USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either
+ * a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */
+ uint8_t JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */
+
+ uint8_t NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical */
+ uint8_t SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack */
+ uint8_t SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data */
+
+ uint8_t JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */
+ } USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+ * on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+ * class specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+ uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */
+
+ uint8_t TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint */
+ uint8_t AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint */
+ } USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface;
+ USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface;
+ USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC;
+ USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+ USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+ USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+ USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+ USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+ USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+ USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+ USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MIDI/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/MIDI/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7d36de8ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MIDI/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.aps b/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e61e77012 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>MIDI</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:13:12</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:13:33</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:13:12</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MIDI\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>MIDI.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>MIDI.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>MIDI.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.c b/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0e4f9df9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.c @@ -0,0 +1,225 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the MIDI input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDI.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MIDI App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: USB_MIDI_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ Joystick_Init();
+ LEDs_Init();
+ HWB_Init();
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and MIDI management tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MIDI_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the MIDI management task started.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup MIDI stream endpoints */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ /* Start MIDI task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MIDI_Task, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Task to handle the generation of MIDI note change events in response to presses of the board joystick, and send them
+ * to the host.
+ */
+TASK(USB_MIDI_Task)
+{
+ static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+ /* Select the MIDI IN stream */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if endpoint is ready to be written to */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */
+ uint8_t JoystickStatus = Joystick_GetStatus();
+ uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+
+ /* Get HWB status - if set use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+ uint8_t Channel = ((HWB_GetStatus()) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+ if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+ SendMIDINoteChange(0x3C, (JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT), 0, Channel);
+
+ if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+ SendMIDINoteChange(0x3D, (JoystickStatus & JOY_UP), 0, Channel);
+
+ if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+ SendMIDINoteChange(0x3E, (JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT), 0, Channel);
+
+ if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+ SendMIDINoteChange(0x3F, (JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN), 0, Channel);
+
+ if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+ SendMIDINoteChange(0x3B, (JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS), 0, Channel);
+
+ /* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */
+ PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+ }
+
+ /* Select the MIDI OUT stream */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if endpoint is ready to be read from, if so discard its (unused) data */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MIDI_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Sends a MIDI note change event (note on or off) to the MIDI output jack, on the given virtual cable ID and channel.
+ *
+ * \param Pitch Pitch of the note to turn on or off
+ * \param OnOff Set to true if the note is on (being held down), or false otherwise
+ * \param CableID ID of the virtual cable to send the note change to
+ * \param Channel MIDI channel number to send the note change event to
+ */
+void SendMIDINoteChange(const uint8_t Pitch, const bool OnOff, const uint8_t CableID, const uint8_t Channel)
+{
+ /* Wait until endpoint ready for more data */
+ while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+
+ /* Check if the message should be a Note On or Note Off command */
+ uint8_t Command = ((OnOff)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+
+ /* Write the Packet Header to the endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte((CableID << 4) | (Command >> 4));
+
+ /* Write the Note On/Off command with the specified channel, pitch and velocity */
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Command | Channel);
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Pitch);
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY);
+
+ /* Send the data in the endpoint to the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.h b/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..733a7baed --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.h @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdbool.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> // Joystick driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h> // Hardware Button driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */
+ #define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON 0x90
+
+ /** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */
+ #define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF 0x80
+
+ /** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events, as no pressure sensor is mounted */
+ #define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY 64
+
+ /** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel
+ * addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.
+ *
+ * \param channel MIDI channel number to address
+ */
+ #define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel) (channel - 1)
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum MIDI_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Task Definitions: */
+ TASK(USB_MIDI_Task);
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void SendMIDINoteChange(const uint8_t Pitch, const bool OnOff,
+ const uint8_t CableID, const uint8_t Channel);
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.txt b/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3eb60cdc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MIDI/MIDI.txt @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Audio Class</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification</td>
+ * <td>USB-MIDI Audio Class Extention Specification</td>
+ * <td>General MIDI Specification</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices.
+ * It is built upon the USB Audio class.
+ *
+ * Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and
+ * are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any
+ * MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices.
+ *
+ * If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If
+ * the HWB is set, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected.
+ *
+ * This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being
+ * generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/MIDI/makefile b/Demos/Device/MIDI/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09bd0c28f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MIDI/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MIDI
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b02ed6c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c @@ -0,0 +1,477 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ * blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ * or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ * as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ * the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ * them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ * \param BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ * \param TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+ uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+ uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+ uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+ /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+ Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+ Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+ /* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+ /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+ while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+
+ while (TotalBlocks)
+ {
+ uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+ /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+ while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+ if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
+ {
+ /* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+ while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+ }
+
+ /* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+ if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+ /* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+ CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+ CurrDFPage++;
+
+ /* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+ Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+ Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+ /* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+ if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+ Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+ }
+#endif
+
+ /* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+ }
+
+ /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+
+ /* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+ CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+ /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+ BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+ TotalBlocks--;
+ }
+
+ /* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+ Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+ /* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+ if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+ Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ * the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ * \param BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ * \param TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+ uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+ uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+ uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+ /* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+ Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+ /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+ while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+
+ while (TotalBlocks)
+ {
+ uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+ /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+ while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+ if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
+ {
+ /* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+ while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+ }
+
+ /* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+ if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+ CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+ CurrDFPage++;
+
+ /* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+ Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+ /* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ }
+
+ /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+ /* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+ CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+ /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+ BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+ TotalBlocks--;
+ }
+
+ /* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+ if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()))
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+ Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from
+ * the a given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ * dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ * dataflash.
+ *
+ * \param BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ * \param TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write
+ * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+ uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+ uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+ uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+ /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+ Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+ Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+ /* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+ while (TotalBlocks)
+ {
+ uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+ /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+ while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+ if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+ /* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+ CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+ CurrDFPage++;
+
+ /* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+ Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+ Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+ /* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+ if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+ Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+ }
+#endif
+
+ /* Send the dataflash buffer write command */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+ }
+
+ /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */
+ for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+ Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+ /* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+ CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+ /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+ BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */
+ TotalBlocks--;
+ }
+
+ /* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+ Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+ /* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+ Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into
+ * the a preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ * the files stored on the dataflash.
+ *
+ * \param BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ * \param TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read
+ * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks, uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+ uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+ uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+ uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+ /* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+ Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+ while (TotalBlocks)
+ {
+ uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+ /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */
+ while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Check if end of dataflash page reached */
+ if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+ {
+ /* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+ CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+ CurrDFPage++;
+
+ /* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */
+ Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+ /* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+ Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+ }
+
+ /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */
+ for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+ *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+ /* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+ CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+ /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+ BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+ TotalBlocks--;
+ }
+
+ /* Deselect all dataflash chips */
+ Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+ /* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+ Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+ /* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+ if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+ {
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+ /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+ }
+
+ /* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+ #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+ Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+ /* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+ if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+ {
+ Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+ /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+ }
+ #endif
+
+ /* Deselect current dataflash chip */
+ Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1332fd3a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+
+ #include "MassStorage.h"
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> // Function Attribute, Atomic, Debug and ISR Macros
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h> // Dataflash chip driver
+
+ /* Preprocessor Checks: */
+ #if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+ #error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+ #endif
+
+ /* Defines: */
+ /** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */
+ #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+ /** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+ * storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size.
+ */
+ #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE 512
+
+ /** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. */
+ #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+ void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+ void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+ uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+ void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+ uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+ void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a6173156a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x00,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2045,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: 0x03,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 1,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED,
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x08,
+ SubClass: 0x06,
+ Protocol: 0x50,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ DataInEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ },
+
+ DataOutEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(22), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo"
+};
+
+/** Serial number descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing a string of HEX characters at least 12
+ * digits in length to uniquely identify a device when concatenated with the device's Vendor and Product IDs. By
+ * using the unique serial number string to identify a device, the device drivers do not need to be reinstalled
+ * each time the device is inserted into a different USB port on the same system. <b>This should be unique between
+ * devices, or conflicts will occur if two devices sharing the same serial number are inserted into the same system
+ * at the same time.</b>
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM SerialNumberString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(12), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"000000000000"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x03:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(SerialNumberString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&SerialNumberString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a64d72e92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+ #define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM 3
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+ #define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM 4
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+ #define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE 64
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a7b900160 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..483bc4cab --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>MassStorage</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:12:09</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:12:25</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:12:09</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MassStorage\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET>JTAGICE mkII</CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART>AT90USB1287.xml</CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>DataflashManager.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>MassStorage.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>SCSI.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>DataflashManager.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>MassStorage.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>SCSI.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>SCSI_Codes.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>at90usb1287</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>MassStorage.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.c b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92e33073c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.c @@ -0,0 +1,405 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the Mass Storage demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#define INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C
+#include "MassStorage.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MassStore App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_MassStorage , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/* Global Variables */
+/** Structure to hold the latest Command Block Wrapper issued by the host, containing a SCSI command to execute. */
+CommandBlockWrapper_t CommandBlock;
+
+/** Structure to hold the latest Command Status Wrapper to return to the host, containing the status of the last issued command. */
+CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus = { Signature: CSW_SIGNATURE };
+
+/** Flag to asyncronously abort any in-progress data transfers upon the reception of a mass storage reset command. */
+volatile bool IsMassStoreReset = false;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ LEDs_Init();
+ Dataflash_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2);
+
+ /* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+ DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the
+ * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled
+ * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset)
+{
+ /* Select the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+ /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */
+ USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+
+ /* Reset the MSReset flag upon connection */
+ IsMassStoreReset = false;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running mass storage task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStorage, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup Mass Storage In and Out Endpoints */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ /* Start mass storage task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStorage, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Mass Storage class-specific
+ * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ /* Process UFI specific control requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_MassStorageReset:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Indicate that the current transfer should be aborted */
+ IsMassStoreReset = true;
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_GetMaxLUN:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Indicate to the host the number of supported LUNs (virtual disks) on the device */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(TOTAL_LUNS - 1);
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MassStorage_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ case Status_CommandBlockError:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_ProcessingCommandBlock:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the Mass Storage interface, reading in Command Block Wrappers from the host, processing the SCSI commands they
+ * contain, and returning Command Status Wrappers back to the host to indicate the success or failure of the last issued command.
+ */
+TASK(USB_MassStorage)
+{
+ /* Check if the USB System is connected to a Host */
+ if (USB_IsConnected)
+ {
+ /* Select the Data Out Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check to see if a command from the host has been issued */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Indicate busy */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_ProcessingCommandBlock);
+
+ /* Process sent command block from the host */
+ if (ReadInCommandBlock())
+ {
+ /* Check direction of command, select Data IN endpoint if data is from the device */
+ if (CommandBlock.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN)
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Decode the received SCSI command */
+ SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand();
+
+ /* Load in the CBW tag into the CSW to link them together */
+ CommandStatus.Tag = CommandBlock.Tag;
+
+ /* Load in the data residue counter into the CSW */
+ CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = CommandBlock.DataTransferLength;
+
+ /* Stall the selected data pipe if command failed (if data is still to be transferred) */
+ if ((CommandStatus.Status == Command_Fail) && (CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue))
+ Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+ /* Return command status block to the host */
+ ReturnCommandStatus();
+
+ /* Check if a Mass Storage Reset ocurred */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ {
+ /* Reset the data endpoint banks */
+ Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+ Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Clear the abort transfer flag */
+ IsMassStoreReset = false;
+ }
+
+ /* Indicate ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Indicate error reading in the command block from the host */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_CommandBlockError);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to read in a command block from the host, via the bulk data OUT endpoint. This function reads in the next command block
+ * if one has been issued, and performs validation to ensure that the block command is valid.
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if a valid command block has been read in from the endpoint, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void)
+{
+ /* Select the Data Out endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Read in command block header */
+ Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock, (sizeof(CommandBlock) - sizeof(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData)),
+ AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return false;
+
+ /* Verify the command block - abort if invalid */
+ if ((CommandBlock.Signature != CBW_SIGNATURE) ||
+ (CommandBlock.LUN >= TOTAL_LUNS) ||
+ (CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength > MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH))
+ {
+ /* Stall both data pipes until reset by host */
+ Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+ Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ /* Read in command block command data */
+ Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData,
+ CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength,
+ AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return false;
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+/** Returns the filled Command Status Wrapper back to the host via the bulk data IN endpoint, waiting for the host to clear any
+ * stalled data endpoints as needed.
+ */
+static void ReturnCommandStatus(void)
+{
+ /* Select the Data Out endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM);
+
+ /* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */
+ while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+ {
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Select the Data In endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM);
+
+ /* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */
+ while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+ {
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Write the CSW to the endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatus),
+ AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return;
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+}
+
+/** Stream callback function for the Endpoint stream read and write functions. This callback will abort the current stream transfer
+ * if a Mass Storage Reset request has been issued to the control endpoint.
+ */
+STREAM_CALLBACK(AbortOnMassStoreReset)
+{
+ /* Abort if a Mass Storage reset command was received */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return STREAMCALLBACK_Abort;
+
+ /* Continue with the current stream operation */
+ return STREAMCALLBACK_Continue;
+}
+
+/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when a control request has been issued to the control endpoint,
+ * so that the request can be processed. As several elements of the Mass Storage implementation require asynchronous control requests
+ * (such as endpoint stall clearing and Mass Storage Reset requests during data transfers) this is done via interrupts rather than
+ * polling.
+ */
+ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+ /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */
+ if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP))
+ {
+ /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */
+ Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+ /* Process the control request */
+ USB_USBTask();
+
+ /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */
+ USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP);
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.h b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a30e7f746 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.h @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for MassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+ #include "SCSI.h"
+ #include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h> // Dataflash chip driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Mass Storage Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface, ready for the next command. */
+ #define REQ_MassStorageReset 0xFF
+
+ /** Mass Storage Class specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical Units (drives) in the SCSI device. */
+ #define REQ_GetMaxLUN 0xFE
+
+ /** Maximum length of a SCSI command which can be issued by the device or host in a Mass Storage bulk wrapper. */
+ #define MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH 16
+
+ /** Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between
+ * each drive - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.
+ */
+ #define TOTAL_LUNS 2
+
+ /** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+ #define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
+
+ /** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
+ #define CBW_SIGNATURE 0x43425355UL
+
+ /** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
+ #define CSW_SIGNATURE 0x53425355UL
+
+ /** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */
+ #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7)
+
+ /** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */
+ #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN (1 << 7)
+
+ /* Type defines: */
+ /** Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block */
+ uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
+ uint32_t DataTransferLength; /** Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes */
+ uint8_t Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction */
+ uint8_t LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to */
+ uint8_t SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array */
+ uint8_t SCSICommandData[MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block */
+ } CommandBlockWrapper_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status */
+ uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */
+ uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command */
+ uint8_t Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */
+ } CommandStatusWrapper_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */
+ enum MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */
+ Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command */
+ Phase_Error = 2 /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum MassStorage_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ Status_CommandBlockError = 3, /**< Processing a SCSI command block from the host */
+ Status_ProcessingCommandBlock = 4, /**< Error during the processing of a SCSI command block from the host */
+ };
+
+ /* Global Variables: */
+ extern CommandBlockWrapper_t CommandBlock;
+ extern CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus;
+ extern volatile bool IsMassStoreReset;
+
+ /* Task Definitions: */
+ TASK(USB_MassStorage);
+
+ /* Stream Callbacks: */
+ STREAM_CALLBACK(AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+ #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C)
+ static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void);
+ static void ReturnCommandStatus(void);
+ #endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e8adadbc --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard</td>
+ * <td>USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard</td>
+ * <td>SCSI Primary Commands Specification</td>
+ * <td>SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Dual LUN Mass Storage demonstration application. This gives a simple
+ * reference application for implementing a multiple LUN USB Mass Storage
+ * device using the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no
+ * special drivers required).
+ *
+ * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
+ * external mass storage device with two LUNs (seperate disks) which may
+ * be formatted and used in the same manner as commercial USB Mass Storage
+ * devices.
+ *
+ * You will need to format the mass storage drives upon first run of this
+ * demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
+ * the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
+ * as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
+ *
+ * This demo is not restricted to only two LUNs; by changing the TOTAL_LUNS
+ * value in MassStorageDualLUN.h, any number of LUNs can be used (from 1 to
+ * 255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available
+ * Dataflash memory.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ * <td>MassStorage.h</td>
+ * <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive
+ * - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI.c b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9c552691 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI.c @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ * devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ * which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI reponse data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ * features and capabilities.
+ */
+SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+ {
+ DeviceType: 0,
+ PeripheralQualifier: 0,
+
+ Removable: true,
+
+ Version: 0,
+
+ ResponseDataFormat: 2,
+ NormACA: false,
+ TrmTsk: false,
+ AERC: false,
+
+ AdditionalLength: 0x1F,
+
+ SoftReset: false,
+ CmdQue: false,
+ Linked: false,
+ Sync: false,
+ WideBus16Bit: false,
+ WideBus32Bit: false,
+ RelAddr: false,
+
+ VendorID: "LUFA",
+ ProductID: "Dataflash Disk",
+ RevisionID: {'0','.','0','0'},
+ };
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ * command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+ {
+ ResponseCode: 0x70,
+ AdditionalLength: 0x0A,
+ };
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ * to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ * a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ */
+void SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void)
+{
+ bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+ /* Run the apropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+ switch (CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+ {
+ case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+ CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry();
+ break;
+ case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+ CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense();
+ break;
+ case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+ CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10();
+ break;
+ case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+ CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic();
+ break;
+ case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+ CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_WRITE);
+ break;
+ case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+ CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_READ);
+ break;
+ case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+ case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+ case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+ /* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+ CommandSuccess = true;
+ CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+ break;
+ default:
+ /* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+ SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+ SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+ SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Check if command was successfully processed */
+ if (CommandSuccess)
+ {
+ /* Command succeeded - set the CSW status and update the SENSE key */
+ CommandStatus.Status = Command_Pass;
+
+ SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+ SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+ SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Command failed - set the CSW status - failed command function updates the SENSE key */
+ CommandStatus.Status = Command_Fail;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ * and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void)
+{
+ uint16_t AllocationLength = (((uint16_t)CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) |
+ CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]);
+ uint16_t BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength :
+ sizeof(InquiryData);
+
+ /* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+ if ((CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+ CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+ {
+ /* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+ SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+ SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+ SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ /* Write the INQUIRY data to the endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+ uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+
+ /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+ CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ * including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void)
+{
+ uint8_t AllocationLength = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+ uint8_t BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData);
+
+ /* Send the SENSE data - this indicates to the host the status of the last command */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+ uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred];
+
+ /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), AbortOnMassStoreReset);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+ CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ * on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void)
+{
+ /* Send the total number of logical blocks in the current LUN */
+ Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+
+ /* Send the logical block size of the device (must be 512 bytes) */
+ Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+ /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+ if (IsMassStoreReset)
+ return false;
+
+ /* Send the endpoint data packet to the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+ CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command peforms a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ * board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ * supported.
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+ /* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+ if (!(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+ {
+ /* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+ SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+ SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+ SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ /* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+ Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+ ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+ Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+ /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+ if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+ {
+ /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+ SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+ SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+ SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+ /* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+ Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+ Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+ ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+ Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+ /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+ if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+ {
+ /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+ SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+ SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+ SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+ return false;
+ }
+ #endif
+
+ /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+ CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+ return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ * and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ * reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ * \param IsDataRead Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+ uint32_t BlockAddress;
+ uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+ /* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
+ ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[3] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2];
+ ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[2] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3];
+ ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[1] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+ ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[0] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[5];
+
+ /* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */
+ ((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[1] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7];
+ ((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[0] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[8];
+
+ /* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+ if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+ {
+ /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+ SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+ SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+ SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+ return false;
+ }
+
+ #if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+ /* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+ BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+ #endif
+
+ /* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+ if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+ DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+ else
+ DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+ /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+ CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+ return true;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI.h b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a0be39001 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI.h @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> // Function Attribute, Atomic, Debug and ISR Macros
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+
+ #include "MassStorage.h"
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+ #include "DataflashManager.h"
+ #include "SCSI_Codes.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+ * is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+ * the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+ *
+ * \param key New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+ * \param acode New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+ * \param aqual New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+ */
+ #define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual) MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = key; \
+ SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = acode; \
+ SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = aqual; }MACROE
+
+ /** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+ #define DATA_READ true
+
+ /** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+ #define DATA_WRITE false
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a SCSI response structure to a SCSI INQUIRY command. For details of the
+ * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ unsigned int DeviceType : 5;
+ unsigned int PeripheralQualifier : 3;
+
+ unsigned int _RESERVED1 : 7;
+ unsigned int Removable : 1;
+
+ uint8_t Version;
+
+ unsigned int ResponseDataFormat : 4;
+ unsigned int _RESERVED2 : 1;
+ unsigned int NormACA : 1;
+ unsigned int TrmTsk : 1;
+ unsigned int AERC : 1;
+
+ uint8_t AdditionalLength;
+ uint8_t _RESERVED3[2];
+
+ unsigned int SoftReset : 1;
+ unsigned int CmdQue : 1;
+ unsigned int _RESERVED4 : 1;
+ unsigned int Linked : 1;
+ unsigned int Sync : 1;
+ unsigned int WideBus16Bit : 1;
+ unsigned int WideBus32Bit : 1;
+ unsigned int RelAddr : 1;
+
+ uint8_t VendorID[8];
+ uint8_t ProductID[16];
+ uint8_t RevisionID[4];
+ } SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a SCSI sense structure to a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. For details of the
+ * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t ResponseCode;
+
+ uint8_t SegmentNumber;
+
+ unsigned int SenseKey : 4;
+ unsigned int _RESERVED1 : 1;
+ unsigned int ILI : 1;
+ unsigned int EOM : 1;
+ unsigned int FileMark : 1;
+
+ uint8_t Information[4];
+ uint8_t AdditionalLength;
+ uint8_t CmdSpecificInformation[4];
+ uint8_t AdditionalSenseCode;
+ uint8_t AdditionalSenseQualifier;
+ uint8_t FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
+ uint8_t SenseKeySpecific[3];
+ } SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void);
+
+ #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+ static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void);
+ static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void);
+ static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void);
+ static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void);
+ static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead);
+ #endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b2213de2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to
+ * the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and
+ * the SENSE data.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_
+#define _SCSI_CODES_H_
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ #define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY 0x12
+ #define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE 0x03
+ #define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY 0x00
+ #define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10 0x25
+ #define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC 0x1D
+ #define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL 0x1E
+ #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10 0x2A
+ #define SCSI_CMD_READ_10 0x28
+ #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6 0x0A
+ #define SCSI_CMD_READ_6 0x08
+ #define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10 0x2F
+ #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6 0x1A
+ #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10 0x5A
+
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD 0x00
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR 0x01
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY 0x02
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR 0x03
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR 0x04
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST 0x05
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION 0x06
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT 0x07
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK 0x08
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC 0x09
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED 0x0A
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND 0x0B
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW 0x0D
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE 0x0E
+
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION 0x00
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY 0x04
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB 0x24
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED 0x27
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR 0x31
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND 0x20
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT 0x3A
+
+ #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER 0x00
+ #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED 0x01
+ #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED 0x02
+ #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS 0x07
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/MassStorage/makefile b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a25c2335d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/MassStorage/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,731 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MassStorage
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ SCSI.c \
+ DataflashManager.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/Mouse/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dac048b97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ * more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+ 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */
+ 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */
+ 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */
+ 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */
+ 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Application) */
+ 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */
+ 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */
+ 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */
+ 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */
+ 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */
+ 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */
+ 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */
+ 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */
+ 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */
+ 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */
+ 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */
+ 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */
+ 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */
+ 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */
+ 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */
+ 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */
+ 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */
+ 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */
+ 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */
+ 0xC0, /* End Collection */
+ 0xC0 /* End Collection */
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x00,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2041,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 1,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0x00,
+ AlternateSetting: 0x00,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x03,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ MouseHID:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID},
+
+ HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11),
+ CountryCode: 0x00,
+ TotalHIDReports: 0x01,
+ HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report,
+ HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport)
+ },
+
+ MouseEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x02
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_HID:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Report:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport);
+ Size = sizeof(MouseReport);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Mouse/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1fcee7212 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+ * specification for details on the structure elements.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+
+ uint16_t HIDSpec;
+ uint8_t CountryCode;
+
+ uint8_t TotalHIDReports;
+
+ uint8_t HIDReportType;
+ uint16_t HIDReportLength;
+ } USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+ typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+ #define MOUSE_EPNUM 1
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+ #define MOUSE_EPSIZE 8
+
+ /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_HID 0x21
+
+ /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+ #define DTYPE_Report 0x22
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Mouse/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62c4db110 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.aps b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ae163797 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>Mouse</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:13:52</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:14:08</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:13:52</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Mouse\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET>JTAGICE mkII</CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART>AT90USB1287.xml</CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Mouse.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Mouse.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>at90usb1287</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>Mouse.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.c b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c066d424a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.c @@ -0,0 +1,460 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Mouse.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ #endif
+
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ { Task: USB_Mouse_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ #endif
+};
+
+/* Global Variables */
+/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot
+ * protocol reporting mode.
+ */
+bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
+
+/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports
+ * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse).
+ */
+uint8_t IdleCount = 0;
+
+/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle
+ * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request
+ * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved.
+ */
+uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ Joystick_Init();
+ LEDs_Init();
+ HWB_Init();
+
+ /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */
+ OCR0A = 0x7D;
+ TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+ TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
+ TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+ #endif
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+
+ /* Default to report protocol on connect */
+ UsingReportProtocol = true;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the
+ * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled
+ * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset)
+{
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Select the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+ /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */
+ USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP);
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and Mouse reporting tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running keyboard reporting and USB management tasks */
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Report, TASK_STOP);
+ #endif
+
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+ #endif
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the mouse reporting task started.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */
+ USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN);
+ #endif
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ #if !defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Start running mouse reporting task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Report, TASK_RUN);
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are
+ * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ /* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_GetReport:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData;
+
+ /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */
+ CreateMouseReport(&MouseReportData);
+
+ /* Ignore report type and ID number value */
+ Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+ /* Ignore unused Interface number value */
+ Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+ /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */
+ uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */
+ if (wLength > sizeof(MouseReportData))
+ wLength = sizeof(MouseReportData);
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, wLength);
+
+ /* Clear the report data afterwards */
+ memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_GetProtocol:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol);
+
+ /* Send the flag to the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetProtocol:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */
+ uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
+ UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000);
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetIdle:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */
+ uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Get idle period in MSB */
+ IdleCount = (wValue >> 8);
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_GetIdle:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the current idle duration to the host */
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount);
+
+ /* Send the flag to the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the
+ * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period.
+ */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+ /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
+ if (IdleMSRemaining)
+ IdleMSRemaining--;
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ */
+void CreateMouseReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData)
+{
+ uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+
+ /* Clear the report contents */
+ memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t));
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+ ReportData->Y = -1;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+ ReportData->Y = 1;
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+ ReportData->X = 1;
+ else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+ ReportData->X = -1;
+
+ if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+ ReportData->Button = (1 << 0);
+
+ if (HWB_GetStatus())
+ ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1);
+}
+
+/** Sends the next HID report to the host, via the keyboard data endpoint. */
+static inline void SendNextReport(void)
+{
+ static USB_MouseReport_Data_t PrevMouseReportData;
+ USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData;
+ bool SendReport = true;
+
+ /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */
+ CreateMouseReport(&MouseReportData);
+
+ /* Check if the idle period is set*/
+ if (IdleCount)
+ {
+ /* Determine if the idle period has elapsed */
+ if (!(IdleMSRemaining))
+ {
+ /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */
+ IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Idle period not elapsed, indicate that a report must not be sent unless the report has changed */
+ SendReport = (memcmp(&PrevMouseReportData, &MouseReportData, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)) != 0);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Save the current report data for later comparison to check for changes */
+ PrevMouseReportData = MouseReportData;
+
+ /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport)
+ {
+ /* Write Mouse Report Data */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the Mouse_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+#if !defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+/** Task to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */
+TASK(USB_Mouse_Report)
+{
+ /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host */
+ if (USB_IsConnected)
+ {
+ /* Send the next mouse report to the host */
+ SendNextReport();
+ }
+}
+#endif
+
+/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as
+ * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send
+ * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB
+ * controller. It is also used to respond to standard and class specific requests send to the device on the control
+ * endpoint, by handing them off to the LUFA library when they are received.
+ */
+ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */
+ if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP))
+ {
+ /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */
+ Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+ /* Process the control request */
+ USB_USBTask();
+
+ /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */
+ USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP);
+ }
+ #endif
+
+ #if defined(INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT)
+ /* Check if mouse endpoint has interrupted */
+ if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(MOUSE_EPNUM))
+ {
+ /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */
+ USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN);
+
+ /* Clear the Mouse Report endpoint interrupt and select the endpoint */
+ Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(MOUSE_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Send the next mouse report to the host */
+ SendNextReport();
+ }
+ #endif
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.h b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c9854a8f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.h @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Mouse.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_H_
+#define _MOUSE_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/interrupt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdbool.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> // Joystick driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h> // Hardware Button driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Task Definitions: */
+ TASK(USB_Mouse_Report);
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */
+ #define REQ_GetReport 0x01
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */
+ #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */
+ #define REQ_SetReport 0x09
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */
+ #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+ #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */
+ #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+ * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */
+ int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+ int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+ } USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum Mouse_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void CreateMouseReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData);
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.txt b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6764275ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Mouse/Mouse.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID
+ * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is
+ * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if
+ * it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ * as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
+ * the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
+ * joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
+ * the right mouse button.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this causes the demo to enable interrupts for the control endpoint,
+ * which services control requests from the host. If not defined, the control endpoint
+ * is serviced via polling using the task scheduler.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, this causes the demo to enable interrupts for the data endpoint,
+ * which services outgoing mouse button and movement reports to the host. If not defined,
+ * the data endpoint is serviced via polling using the task scheduler.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/Mouse/makefile b/Demos/Device/Mouse/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dc0c663f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/Mouse/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,729 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = Mouse
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3560403f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the
+ * conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the
+ * device.
+ */
+
+#include "ARP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the
+ * virtual server device on the network.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's ARP header
+ * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header
+ *
+ * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+ DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+ ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+ ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+ /* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */
+ if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&
+ (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))
+ {
+ /* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */
+ if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) ||
+ MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))
+ {
+ /* Fill out the ARP response header */
+ ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+ ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;
+ ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;
+ ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;
+ ARPHeaderOUT->Operation = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);
+
+ /* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */
+ ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;
+ ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;
+
+ /* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */
+ ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;
+ ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;
+
+ /* Return the size of the response so far */
+ return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);
+ }
+ }
+
+ return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8551df85b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ARP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ARP_H_
+#define _ARP_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h>
+
+ #include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+ #include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */
+ #define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST 1
+
+ /** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */
+ #define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY 2
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint16_t HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */
+ uint16_t ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */
+
+ uint8_t HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */
+ uint8_t PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */
+ uint16_t Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */
+
+ MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */
+ IP_Address_t SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */
+ MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */
+ IP_Address_t TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */
+ } ARP_Header_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f220c423 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol
+ * handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided
+ * IP address given to it by the device.
+ */
+
+#include "DHCP.h"
+
+/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.
+ *
+ * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header
+ * \param DHCPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's DHCP header
+ * \param DHCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header
+ *
+ * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+ IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+ DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;
+ DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+ uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+ uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+ DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);
+
+ /* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */
+ memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+ /* Fill out the response DHCP packet */
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops = 0;
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds = 0;
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP = ClientIPAddress;
+ memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+ DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);
+
+ /* Alter the incomming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that
+ when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */
+ IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress = ClientIPAddress;
+ IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;
+
+ /* Process the incomming DHCP packet options */
+ while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+ {
+ /* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */
+ if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+ {
+ if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))
+ {
+ /* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */
+
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER
+ : DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;
+
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;
+
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+ memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+ DHCPOptionsOUTStart += sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+
+ *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+ return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */
+ DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
+ }
+
+ return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f1e14e196 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for DHCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCP_H_
+#define _DHCP_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+ #include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */
+ #define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST 0x01
+
+ /** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */
+ #define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY 0x02
+
+ /** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */
+ #define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET 0x01
+
+ /** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */
+ #define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE 0x63825363
+
+ /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */
+ #define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK 1
+
+ /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */
+ #define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE 53
+
+ /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */
+ #define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER 54
+
+ /** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */
+ #define DHCP_OPTION_PAD 0
+
+ /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */
+ #define DHCP_OPTION_END 255
+
+ /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */
+ #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1
+
+ /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */
+ #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER 2
+
+ /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */
+ #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST 3
+
+ /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */
+ #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE 4
+
+ /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */
+ #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK 5
+
+ /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */
+ #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK 6
+
+ /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */
+ #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE 7
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+ uint8_t HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+ uint8_t HardwareAddressLength; /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+ uint8_t Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+ uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for postive matching between sent and recieved packets */
+
+ uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+ uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+
+ IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+ IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+ IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+ IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+ uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+ uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+ uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+ uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+ } DHCP_Header_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1994c601c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x204C,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ CCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0xFF,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_Header:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x00,
+
+ Data: {0x01, 0x10}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_CallManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x01,
+
+ Data: {0x00, 0x00}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x02,
+
+ Data: {0x00}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_Union:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x06,
+
+ Data: {0x00, 0x01}
+ },
+
+ ManagementEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x02
+ },
+
+ DCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x0A,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ DataOutEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ },
+
+ DataInEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..070c118d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+ * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+ * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+ * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+ *
+ * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+ */
+ #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \
+ struct \
+ { \
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \
+ uint8_t SubType; \
+ uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \
+ }
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 1
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 2
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+ #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 64
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Header;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d7973b78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b8d561509 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet
+ * frames sent and receieved, deferring the processing of subpacket protocols to the appropriate
+ * protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.
+ */
+
+#include "Ethernet.h"
+
+/* Global Variables: */
+/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the incomming Ethernet frame from the host. */
+Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
+
+/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the outgoing Ethernet frame to the host. */
+Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t ServerIPAddress = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t BroadcastIPAddress = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t ClientIPAddress = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+
+/** Processes an incomming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet
+ * frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.
+ */
+void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void)
+{
+ DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN.FrameData);
+
+ /* Cast the incomming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */
+ Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN.FrameData;
+ Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData;
+
+ int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+ /* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */
+ if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||
+ MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&
+ (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))
+ {
+ /* Process the packet depending on its protocol */
+ switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))
+ {
+ case ETHERTYPE_ARP:
+ RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+ &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+ break;
+ case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:
+ RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+ &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Protcol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */
+ if (RetSize > 0)
+ {
+ /* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+ FrameOUTHeader->Source = ServerMACAddress;
+ FrameOUTHeader->Destination = FrameINHeader->Source;
+ FrameOUTHeader->EtherType = FrameINHeader->EtherType;
+
+ /* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+ FrameOUT.FrameLength = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);
+ FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = true;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Check if the packet was processed */
+ if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)
+ {
+ /* Clear the frame buffer */
+ FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = false;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's
+ * compliment of each word, complimented.
+ *
+ * \param Data Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated
+ * \param Bytes Number of bytes in the data buffer to process
+ *
+ * \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value
+ */
+uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+ uint16_t* Words = (uint16_t*)Data;
+ uint32_t Checksum = 0;
+
+ for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)
+ Checksum += Words[CurrWord];
+
+ while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+ Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+
+ return ~Checksum;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23fc325a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Ethernet.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+ #include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+ #include "ICMP.h"
+ #include "TCP.h"
+ #include "UDP.h"
+ #include "DHCP.h"
+ #include "ARP.h"
+ #include "IP.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */
+ #define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}
+
+ /** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */
+ #define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+ /** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+ *
+ * \param MAC1 First MAC address
+ * \param MAC2 Second MAC address
+ *
+ * \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
+ */
+ #define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2) (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)
+
+ /** Maximum size of an incomming or outgoing Ethernet frame in bytes */
+ #define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX 1500
+
+ /** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */
+ #define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE 0x0600
+
+ /** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */
+ #define NO_RESPONSE 0
+
+ /** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */
+ #define NO_PROCESS -1
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents */
+ uint16_t FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer */
+ bool FrameInBuffer; /**< Indicates if a frame is currently stored in the buffer */
+ } Ethernet_Frame_Info_t;
+
+ /** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */
+ MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */
+
+ union
+ {
+ uint16_t EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet subprotocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */
+ uint16_t Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */
+ };
+ } Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;
+
+ /* External Variables: */
+ extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
+ extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
+
+ extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;
+ extern const IP_Address_t ServerIPAddress;
+ extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;
+ extern const IP_Address_t BroadcastIPAddress;
+ extern const IP_Address_t ClientIPAddress;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void);
+ uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ff3433ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by
+ * all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ #define ETHERTYPE_IPV4 0x0800
+ #define ETHERTYPE_ARP 0x0806
+ #define ETHERTYPE_RARP 0x8035
+ #define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK 0x809b
+ #define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP 0x80f3
+ #define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q 0x8100
+ #define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX 0x8137
+ #define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL 0x8138
+ #define ETHERTYPE_IPV6 0x86DD
+ #define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET 0x8819
+ #define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING 0x88a8
+ #define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST 0x8847
+ #define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST 0x8848
+ #define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY 0x8863
+ #define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION 0x8864
+ #define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN 0x888E
+ #define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI 0x889A
+ #define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET 0x88A2
+ #define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT 0x88A4
+ #define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII 0x88CD
+ #define ETHERTYPE_CESoE 0x88D8
+ #define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY 0x88E5
+ #define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL 0x8906
+ #define ETHERTYPE_QINQ 0x9100
+ #define ETHERTYPE_VLLT 0xCAFE
+
+ #define PROTOCOL_ICMP 1
+ #define PROTOCOL_IGMP 2
+ #define PROTOCOL_TCP 6
+ #define PROTOCOL_UDP 17
+ #define PROTOCOL_OSPF 89
+ #define PROTOCOL_SCTP 132
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */
+ } MAC_Address_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */
+ } IP_Address_t;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a15564059 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles
+ * Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host
+ * and the virtual server.
+ */
+
+#include "ICMP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's ICMP header
+ * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header
+ *
+ * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+ ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+ ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+ DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+ /* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */
+ if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)
+ {
+ /* Fill out the ICMP response packet */
+ ICMPHeaderOUT->Type = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;
+ ICMPHeaderOUT->Code = 0;
+ ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+ ICMPHeaderOUT->Id = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;
+ ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;
+
+ uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN.FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN.FrameData));
+
+ /* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */
+ memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+ &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+ DataSize);
+
+ ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));
+
+ /* Return the size of the response so far */
+ return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));
+ }
+
+ return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b20a557e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ICMP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ICMP_H_
+#define _ICMP_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+ #include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */
+ #define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY 0
+
+ /** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */
+ #define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3
+
+ /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */
+ #define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH 4
+
+ /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */
+ #define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE 5
+
+ /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */
+ #define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST 8
+
+ /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */
+ #define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED 11
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for an ICMP message header. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */
+ uint8_t Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */
+ uint16_t Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */
+ uint16_t Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */
+ uint16_t Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */
+ } ICMP_Header_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/IP.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/IP.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..65875bb0a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/IP.c @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the
+ * host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.
+ */
+
+#include "IP.h"
+
+/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ * to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a subprotocol handler.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header
+ * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header
+ *
+ * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ * response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ * next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+ DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+ IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+ IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+ /* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */
+ uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+ int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+ /* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */
+ if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+ !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))
+ {
+ return NO_RESPONSE;
+ }
+
+ /* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */
+ switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)
+ {
+ case PROTOCOL_ICMP:
+ RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(&((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+ &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+ break;
+ case PROTOCOL_TCP:
+ RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,
+ &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+ &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+ break;
+ case PROTOCOL_UDP:
+ RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,
+ &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+ &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+ if (RetSize > 0)
+ {
+ /* Fill out the response IP packet header */
+ IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+ IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+ IPHeaderOUT->Version = 4;
+ IPHeaderOUT->Flags = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->Identification = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->Protocol = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;
+ IPHeaderOUT->TTL = DEFAULT_TTL;
+ IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;
+ IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;
+
+ IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+
+ /* Return the size of the response so far */
+ return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+ }
+
+ return RetSize;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/IP.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/IP.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..119d219e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/IP.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _IP_H_
+#define _IP_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+
+ #include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+ #include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */
+ #define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS { 10, 0, 0, 1}
+
+ /** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */
+ #define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS { 10, 0, 0, 2}
+
+ /** Protocol IP address of the broadcase address */
+ #define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+ /** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */
+ #define DEFAULT_TTL 128
+
+ /** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+ *
+ * \param IP1 First IP address
+ * \param IP2 Second IP address
+ *
+ * \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
+ */
+ #define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2) (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define of an IP packet header. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ unsigned int HeaderLength : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */
+ unsigned int Version : 4; /**< IP protocol version */
+ unsigned int TypeOfService : 8; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */
+ unsigned int TotalLength : 16; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */
+
+ unsigned int Identification : 16; /**< Idenfication value for identifying fragmented packets */
+ unsigned int FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */
+ unsigned int Flags : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */
+
+ unsigned int TTL : 8; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */
+ unsigned int Protocol : 8; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */
+ unsigned int HeaderChecksum : 16; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */
+
+ IP_Address_t SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */
+ IP_Address_t DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */
+ } IP_Header_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a124afec1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +; Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[Version]
+Signature = "$Windows NT$"
+Class = Net
+ClassGUID = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider = %COMPANY%
+DriverVer = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384
+;CatalogFile = device.cat
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%COMPANY% = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64
+
+; Decoration for x86 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTx86]
+%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+; Decoration for x64 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTamd64]
+%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+; Decoration for ia64 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTia64]
+%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+;@@@ This is the common setting for setup
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+; DDInstall section
+; References the in-build Netrndis.inf
+[RNDIS.NT.5.1]
+Characteristics = 0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType = 15
+; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF
+include = netrndis.inf
+needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg = Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+; DDInstal.Services section
+[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services]
+include = netrndis.inf
+needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build
+; (part of the operating system).
+
+; Modify these strings for your device as needed.
+[Strings]
+COMPANY="LUFA Library"
+RNDISDEV="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f0e6ebba8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c @@ -0,0 +1,280 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines
+ accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertient information
+ on the packet through the serial port.
+
+ To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}
+ in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.
+ * Enabled protocol decoders will print incomming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human
+ * readable format.
+ *
+ * Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.
+ * Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile
+ * and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ */
+
+#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame header
+ */
+void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+ #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)
+ Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+ printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" ETHERNET\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameIN.FrameLength);
+
+ if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&
+ !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))
+ {
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+ return;
+ }
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],
+ FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],
+ FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],
+ FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],
+ FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],
+ FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],
+ FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],
+ FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],
+ FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],
+ FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],
+ FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);
+
+ if (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));
+ else
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n"));
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+ #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)
+ ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n ARP\r\n"));
+
+ if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+ !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))
+ {
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+ return;
+ }
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));
+
+ if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)
+ {
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],
+ ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],
+ ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],
+ ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],
+ ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],
+ ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],
+ ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],
+ ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],
+ ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],
+ ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],
+ ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],
+ ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],
+ ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],
+ ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],
+ ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],
+ ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],
+ ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);
+ }
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an IP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+ #if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)
+ IP_Header_t* IPHeader = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+ uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n IP\r\n"));
+
+ if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))
+ {
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+ return;
+ }
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],
+ IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],
+ IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],
+ IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],
+ IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],
+ IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],
+ IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+ #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)
+ ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n ICMP\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+ #if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)
+ TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+ uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n TCP\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);
+
+ if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+ #if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)
+ UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n UDP\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));
+ #endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+ #if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)
+ uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n DHCP\r\n"));
+
+ while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+ {
+ if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+ {
+ switch (DHCPOptions[2])
+ {
+ case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + DISCOVER\r\n"));
+ break;
+ case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + REQUEST\r\n"));
+ break;
+ case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + RELEASE\r\n"));
+ break;
+ case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:
+ printf_P(PSTR(" + DECLINE\r\n"));
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
+ }
+
+ #endif
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06e4c0ad4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.h>
+
+ #include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart);
+ void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+ void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+ void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+ void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+ void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+ void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee0c8c34b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c @@ -0,0 +1,386 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * RNDIS command handler functions. This handles RNDIS commands according to
+ * the Microsoft RNDIS specification, creating a USB Ethernet network adapter.
+ */
+
+#define INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C
+#include "RNDIS.h"
+
+/* Global Variables: */
+/** Physical MAC address of the network adapter, which becomes the MAC address of the host for packets sent to the adapter. */
+static MAC_Address_t PROGMEM AdapterMACAddress = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Vendor description of the adapter. This is overridden by the INF file required to install the appropriate RNDIS drivers for
+ * the device, but may still be used by the OS in some circumstances.
+ */
+static char PROGMEM AdapterVendorDescription[] = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter";
+
+/** List of RNDIS OID commands supported by this adapter. */
+static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[] =
+ {
+ OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST,
+ OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS,
+ OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED,
+ OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE,
+ OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE,
+ OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
+ OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED,
+ OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE,
+ OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE,
+ OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
+ OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION,
+ OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+ OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
+ OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS,
+ OID_GEN_XMIT_OK,
+ OID_GEN_RCV_OK,
+ OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR,
+ OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR,
+ OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER,
+ OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS,
+ OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
+ OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST,
+ OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE,
+ OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT,
+ OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION,
+ OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS,
+ };
+
+/** Buffer for RNDIS messages (as distinct from Ethernet frames sent through the adapter. This must be big enough to hold the entire
+ * Supported OID list, plus the response header. The buffer is half-duplex, and is written to as it is read to save on SRAM - for this
+ * reason, care must be taken when constructing RNDIS responses that unread data is not overwritten when writing in responses.
+ */
+uint8_t RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList) + sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t)];
+
+/** Pointer to the RNDIS message header at the top of the RNDIS message buffer, for convenience. */
+RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+/** Indicates if a RNDIS message response is ready to be sent back to the host. */
+bool ResponseReady = false;
+
+/** Current RNDIS adapter state, a value from the RNDIS_States_t enum. */
+uint8_t CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
+
+/** Current Ethernet packet filter mask. This is non-zero when the adapter is initialized, or zero when disabled. */
+uint32_t CurrPacketFilter = 0;
+
+
+/** Processes the RNDIS message received by the host and stored in the RNDISMessageBuffer global buffer. If a response is
+ * created, the ResponseReady global is updated so that the response is written back to the host upon request.
+ */
+void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void)
+{
+ /* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of
+ this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */
+
+ switch (MessageHeader->MessageType)
+ {
+ case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG:
+ /* Initialize the adapter - return information about the supported RNDIS version and buffer sizes */
+
+ ResponseReady = true;
+
+ RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t* INITIALIZE_Message = (RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+ RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t* INITIALIZE_Response = (RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+ INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t);
+ INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+
+ INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags = REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->Medium = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer = 1;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+ INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor = 0;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset = 0;
+ INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize = 0;
+
+ CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Initialized;
+
+ break;
+ case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG:
+ /* Halt the adapter, reset the adapter state - note that no response should be returned when completed */
+
+ ResponseReady = false;
+ MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
+
+ CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
+
+ break;
+ case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG:
+ /* Request for information about a parameter about the adapter, specified as an OID token */
+
+ ResponseReady = true;
+
+ RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t* QUERY_Message = (RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+ RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t* QUERY_Response = (RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+ uint32_t Query_Oid = QUERY_Message->Oid;
+
+ void* QueryData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+ QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
+ void* ResponseData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t)];
+ uint16_t ResponseSize;
+
+ QUERY_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT;
+ QUERY_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t);
+
+ if (ProcessNDISQuery(Query_Oid, QueryData, QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength,
+ ResponseData, &ResponseSize))
+ {
+ QUERY_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+ QUERY_Response->MessageLength += ResponseSize;
+
+ QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = ResponseSize;
+ QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ QUERY_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+ QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = 0;
+ QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = 0;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG:
+ /* Request to set a parameter of the adapter, specified as an OID token */
+
+ ResponseReady = true;
+
+ RNDIS_SET_MSG_t* SET_Message = (RNDIS_SET_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+ RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t* SET_Response = (RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+ uint32_t SET_Oid = SET_Message->Oid;
+
+ SET_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT;
+ SET_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t);
+ SET_Response->RequestId = SET_Message->RequestId;
+
+ void* SetData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+ SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
+
+ if (ProcessNDISSet(SET_Oid, SetData, SET_Message->InformationBufferLength))
+ SET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+ else
+ SET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+ break;
+ case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG:
+ /* Soft reset the adapter */
+
+ ResponseReady = true;
+
+ RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t* RESET_Response = (RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+ RESET_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT;
+ RESET_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t);
+ RESET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+ RESET_Response->AddressingReset = 0;
+
+ break;
+ case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG:
+ /* Keep alive message sent to the adapter every 5 seconds when idle to ensure it is still responding */
+
+ ResponseReady = true;
+
+ RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t* KEEPALIVE_Message = (RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+ RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t* KEEPALIVE_Response = (RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+ KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT;
+ KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t);
+ KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId;
+ KEEPALIVE_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Processes RNDIS query commands, retrieving information from the adapter and reporting it back to the host. The requested
+ * parameter is given as an OID value.
+ *
+ * \param OId OId value of the parameter being queried
+ * \param QueryData Pointer to any extra query data being sent by the host to the device inside the RNDIS message buffer
+ * \param QuerySize Size in bytes of the extra query data being sent by the host
+ * \param ResponseData Pointer to the start of the query response inside the RNDIS message buffer
+ * \param ResponseSize Pointer to the size in bytes of the response data being sent to the host
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the query was handled, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize,
+ void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize)
+{
+ /* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG messages */
+
+ switch (OId)
+ {
+ case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList);
+
+ /* Copy the list of supported NDIS OID tokens to the response buffer */
+ memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList));
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Always indicate hardware ready */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = NdisHardwareStatusReady;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED:
+ case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Indicate 802.3 (Ethernet) supported by the adapter */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0x00FFFFFF;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE:
+ case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE:
+ case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Indicate that the maximum frame size is the size of the ethernet frame buffer */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription);
+
+ /* Copy vendor description string to the response buffer */
+ memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterVendorDescription, sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription));
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Always indicate that the adapter is connected to a network */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 100000;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS:
+ case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t);
+
+ /* Copy over the fixed adapter MAC to the response buffer */
+ memcpy_P(ResponseData, &AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Indicate only one multicast address supported */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 1;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Indicate the current packet filter mask */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CurrPacketFilter;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK:
+ case OID_GEN_RCV_OK:
+ case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR:
+ case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR:
+ case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER:
+ case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT:
+ case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION:
+ case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE:
+ *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+ /* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */
+ *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = (sizeof(RNDISMessageBuffer) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+
+ return true;
+ default:
+ return false;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Processes RNDIS set commands, setting adapter parameters to values given by the host. The requested parameter is given
+ * as an OID value.
+ *
+ * \param OId OId value of the parameter being set
+ * \param SetData Pointer to the parameter value in the RNDIS message buffer
+ * \param SetSize Size in bytes of the parameter value being sent by the host
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the set was handled, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize)
+{
+ /* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG messages */
+
+ switch (OId)
+ {
+ case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+ /* Save the packet filter mask in case the host queries it again later */
+ CurrPacketFilter = *((uint32_t*)SetData);
+
+ /* Set the RNDIS state to initialized if the packet filter is non-zero */
+ CurrRNDISState = ((CurrPacketFilter) ? RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Data_Initialized);
+
+ return true;
+ case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST:
+ /* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */
+
+ return true;
+ default:
+ return false;
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c75875cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for RNDIS.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_H_
+#define _RNDIS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <stdbool.h>
+
+ #include "RNDISEthernet.h"
+ #include "RNDISConstants.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Physical MAC Address of the USB netowork adapter */
+ #define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}
+
+ /** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR 0x01
+
+ /** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR 0x00
+
+ /** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */
+ #define SEND_ENCAPSULATED_COMMAND 0x00
+
+ /** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */
+ #define GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE 0x01
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */
+ enum RNDIS_States_t
+ {
+ RNDIS_Uninitialized = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized */
+ RNDIS_Initialized = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers */
+ RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for the NDIS hardware states */
+ enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t
+ {
+ NdisHardwareStatusReady, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host */
+ NdisHardwareStatusInitializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing */
+ NdisHardwareStatusReset, /**< Hardware reset */
+ NdisHardwareStatusClosing, /**< Hardware currently closing */
+ NdisHardwareStatusNotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host */
+ };
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */
+ uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */
+ } RNDIS_Message_Header_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t DataOffset;
+ uint32_t DataLength;
+ uint32_t OOBDataOffset;
+ uint32_t OOBDataLength;
+ uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;
+ uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;
+ uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;
+ uint32_t VcHandle;
+ uint32_t Reserved;
+ } RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t RequestId;
+
+ uint32_t MajorVersion;
+ uint32_t MinorVersion;
+ uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+ } RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize complete response message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t RequestId;
+ uint32_t Status;
+
+ uint32_t MajorVersion;
+ uint32_t MinorVersion;
+ uint32_t DeviceFlags;
+ uint32_t Medium;
+ uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;
+ uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+ uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;
+ uint32_t AFListOffset;
+ uint32_t AFListSize;
+ } RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive command message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t RequestId;
+ } RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive complete message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t RequestId;
+ uint32_t Status;
+ } RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Reset complete message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t Status;
+
+ uint32_t AddressingReset;
+ } RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Set command message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t RequestId;
+
+ uint32_t Oid;
+ uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+ uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+ uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+ } RNDIS_SET_MSG_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Set complete response message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t RequestId;
+ uint32_t Status;
+ } RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Query command message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t RequestId;
+
+ uint32_t Oid;
+ uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+ uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+ uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+ } RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS Query complete response message */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t MessageType;
+ uint32_t MessageLength;
+ uint32_t RequestId;
+ uint32_t Status;
+
+ uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+ uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+ } RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t;
+
+ /* External Variables: */
+ extern uint8_t RNDISMessageBuffer[];
+ extern RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader;
+ extern bool ResponseReady;
+ extern uint8_t CurrRNDISState;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void);
+
+ #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C)
+ static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize,
+ void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize);
+ static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize);
+ #endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91a7e898d --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these
+ * constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_H_
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG 0x00000001UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG 0x00000002UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG 0x00000003UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG 0x00000004UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG 0x00000005UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG 0x00000006UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG 0x00000007UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG 0x00000008UL
+
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT 0x80000002UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT 0x80000004UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT 0x80000005UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT 0x80000006UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT 0x80000008UL
+
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS 0x00000000UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE 0xC0000001UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA 0xC0010015UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED 0xC00000BBUL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT 0x4001000BUL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT 0x4001000CUL
+
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED 0x00000000UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED 0x00000001UL
+
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3 0x00000000UL
+
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS 0x00000001UL
+ #define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED 0x00000002UL
+
+ #define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST 0x00010101UL
+ #define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS 0x00010102UL
+ #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED 0x00010103UL
+ #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE 0x00010104UL
+ #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE 0x00010106UL
+ #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE 0x00010111UL
+ #define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED 0x00010107UL
+ #define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE 0x0001010AUL
+ #define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE 0x0001010BUL
+ #define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID 0x0001010CUL
+ #define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION 0x0001010DUL
+ #define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER 0x0001010EUL
+ #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE 0x00010111UL
+ #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS 0x00010114UL
+ #define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK 0x00020101UL
+ #define OID_GEN_RCV_OK 0x00020102UL
+ #define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR 0x00020103UL
+ #define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR 0x00020104UL
+ #define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER 0x00020105UL
+ #define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS 0x01010101UL
+ #define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS 0x01010102UL
+ #define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST 0x01010103UL
+ #define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE 0x01010104UL
+ #define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT 0x01020101UL
+ #define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION 0x01020102UL
+ #define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS 0x01020103UL
+
+#endif
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5d21c1f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>RNDISEthernet</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:17:05</Created><LastEdit>22-Jan-2009 17:52:35</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:17:05</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET>JTAGICE mkII</CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART>AT90USB1287.xml</CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>ARP.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Ethernet.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>ICMP.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>IP.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>ProtocolDecoders.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>RNDIS.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>RNDISEthernet.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>TCP.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>Webserver.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>ARP.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Ethernet.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>EthernetProtocols.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>ICMP.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>IP.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>ProtocolDecoders.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>RNDIS.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>RNDISEthernet.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>TCP.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>Webserver.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>at90usb1287</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>RNDISEthernet.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20081205\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20081205\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><ProjectFiles><Files><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ARP.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Descriptors.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Ethernet.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\EthernetProtocols.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ICMP.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\IP.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ProtocolDecoders.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDIS.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDISEthernet.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\TCP.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Telnet.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Webserver.h</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ARP.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Descriptors.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Ethernet.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ICMP.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\IP.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ProtocolDecoders.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDIS.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDISEthernet.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\TCP.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Telnet.c</Name><Name>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Webserver.c</Name></Files></ProjectFiles><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="1" orderaddress="1" ordergroup="1"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3f9bb187a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c @@ -0,0 +1,357 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA RNDIS App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: Ethernet_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: TCP_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: RNDIS_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ LEDs_Init();
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+
+ /* Webserver Initialization */
+ TCP_Init();
+ Webserver_Init();
+
+ printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\n****** RNDIS Demo running. ******\r\n"));
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs and stops all the relevent tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running TCP/IP and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(RNDIS_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Ethernet_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TCP_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the RNDIS device endpoints and starts the relevent tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ /* Start TCP/IP tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(RNDIS_Task, TASK_RUN);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Ethernet_Task, TASK_RUN);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TCP_Task, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the RNDIS control commands,
+ * which set up the USB RNDIS network adapter), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ /* Discard the unused wValue parameter */
+ Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+ /* Discard the unused wIndex parameter */
+ Endpoint_Discard_Word();
+
+ /* Read in the wLength parameter */
+ uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ /* Process RNDIS class commands */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case SEND_ENCAPSULATED_COMMAND:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Read in the RNDIS message into the message buffer */
+ Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, wLength);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+
+ /* Process the RNDIS message */
+ ProcessRNDISControlMessage();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Check if a response to the last message is ready */
+ if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+ {
+ /* Set the response to a single 0x00 byte to indicate that no response is ready */
+ RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0;
+ MessageHeader->MessageLength = 1;
+ }
+
+ /* Check if less than the requested number of bytes to transfer */
+ if (MessageHeader->MessageLength < wLength)
+ wLength = MessageHeader->MessageLength;
+
+ /* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the message response data to the endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, wLength);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+
+ /* Reset the message header once again after transmission */
+ MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the RNDISEthernet_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ case Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the sending and receiving of encapsulated RNDIS data and notifications. This removes the RNDIS
+ * wrapper from recieved Ethernet frames and places them in the FrameIN global buffer, or adds the RNDIS wrapper
+ * to a frame in the FrameOUT global before sending the buffer contents to the host.
+ */
+TASK(RNDIS_Task)
+{
+ /* Select the notification endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if a message response is ready for the host */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && ResponseReady)
+ {
+ USB_Notification_t Notification = (USB_Notification_t)
+ {
+ bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ bNotification: NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE,
+ wValue: 0,
+ wIndex: 0,
+ wLength: 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Indicate that a message response is ready for the host */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Indicate a response is no longer ready */
+ ResponseReady = false;
+ }
+
+ /* Don't process the data endpoints until the system is in the data initialized state, and the buffer is free */
+ if ((CurrRNDISState == RNDIS_Data_Initialized) && !(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+ {
+ /* Create a new packet header for reading/writing */
+ RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t RNDISPacketHeader;
+
+ /* Select the data OUT endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if the data OUT endpoint contains data, and that the IN buffer is empty */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && !(FrameIN.FrameInBuffer))
+ {
+ /* Read in the packet message header */
+ Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t));
+
+ /* Stall the request if the data is too large */
+ if (RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX)
+ {
+ Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Read in the Ethernet frame into the buffer */
+ Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(FrameIN.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Store the size of the Ethernet frame */
+ FrameIN.FrameLength = RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength;
+
+ /* Indicate Ethernet IN buffer full */
+ FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = true;
+ }
+
+ /* Select the data IN endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if the data IN endpoint is ready for more data, and that the IN buffer is full */
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer)
+ {
+ /* Clear the packet header with all 0s so that the relevant fields can be filled */
+ memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t));
+
+ /* Construct the required packet header fields in the buffer */
+ RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG;
+ RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) + FrameOUT.FrameLength);
+ RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+ RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength = FrameOUT.FrameLength;
+
+ /* Send the packet header to the host */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t));
+
+ /* Send the Ethernet frame data to the host */
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(FrameOUT.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength);
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* Indicate Ethernet OUT buffer no longer full */
+ FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = false;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/** Ethernet frame processing task. This task checks to see if a frame has been received, and if so hands off the processing
+ * of the frame to the Ethernet processing routines.
+ */
+TASK(Ethernet_Task)
+{
+ /* Task for Ethernet processing. Incoming ethernet frames are loaded into the FrameIN structure, and
+ outgoing frames should be loaded into the FrameOUT structure. Both structures can only hold a single
+ Ethernet frame at a time, so the FrameInBuffer bool is used to indicate when the buffers contain data. */
+
+ /* Check if a frame has been written to the IN frame buffer */
+ if (FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)
+ {
+ /* Indicate packet processing started */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame);
+
+ /* Process the ethernet frame - replace this with your own Ethernet handler code as desired */
+ Ethernet_ProcessPacket();
+
+ /* Indicate packet processing complete */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83e49ce84 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+ #include "RNDIS.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+ #include "TCP.h"
+ #include "ARP.h"
+ #include "Webserver.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Notification value to indicate that a frame is ready to be read by the host. */
+ #define NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE 0x01
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a RNDIS notification message, for transmission to the RNDIS host via the notification
+ * Endpoint.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t bmRequestType; /**< Notification type, a mask of values from SrdRequestType.h */
+ uint8_t bNotification; /**< Notification index, indicating what the RNDIS notification relates to */
+ uint16_t wValue; /**< Two byte notification value parameter */
+ uint16_t wIndex; /**< Two byte notification index parameter */
+ uint16_t wLength; /**< Size of data payload following the notification header */
+ } USB_Notification_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum RNDISEthernet_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame = 3, /**< Currently processing an ethernet frame from the host */
+ };
+
+ /* Tasks: */
+ TASK(RNDIS_Task);
+ TASK(Ethernet_Task);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..306cf8526 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.
+ * This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ * a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for
+ * ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft
+ * standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually
+ * patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no
+ * manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.
+ *
+ * Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
+ * is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will
+ * enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the
+ * need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
+ * right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If
+ * Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix
+ * will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and
+ * then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.
+ *
+ * When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network
+ * adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received
+ * from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP
+ * stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be
+ * accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or
+ * through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports
+ * ping echos via the ICMP protocol.
+ *
+ * \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations
+ * and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor
+ * compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is
+ * recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP
+ * stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>
+ * <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ * <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b4a65344c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c @@ -0,0 +1,614 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission
+ * and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data
+ * delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.
+ */
+
+#define INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C
+#include "TCP.h"
+
+/* Global Variables: */
+/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are
+ * stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This
+ * allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.
+ */
+TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active
+ * (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections
+ * not present in the array are closed.
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionState_t ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];
+
+
+/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application
+ * level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT
+ * buffer for later transmission.
+ */
+TASK(TCP_Task)
+{
+ /* Task to hand off TCP packets to and from the listening applications. */
+
+ /* Run each application in sequence, to process incomming and generate outgoing packets */
+ for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */
+ for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Run the application handler for the port */
+ if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) &&
+ (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))
+ {
+ PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry], &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */
+ if (FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer)
+ return;
+
+ /* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */
+ for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */
+ if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&
+ (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))
+ {
+ Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData;
+ IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];
+ TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+ sizeof(IP_Header_t)];
+ void* TCPDataOUT = &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+ sizeof(IP_Header_t) +
+ sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];
+
+ uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;
+
+ /* Fill out the TCP data */
+ TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);
+ TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);
+ TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+ TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer = 0;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved = 0;
+
+ memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);
+
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress,
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,
+ (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));
+
+ PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+
+ /* Fill out the response IP header */
+ IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);
+ IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+ IPHeaderOUT->Version = 4;
+ IPHeaderOUT->Flags = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->Identification = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = 0;
+ IPHeaderOUT->Protocol = PROTOCOL_TCP;
+ IPHeaderOUT->TTL = DEFAULT_TTL;
+ IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress = ServerIPAddress;
+ IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;
+
+ IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+
+ PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);
+
+ /* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+ FrameOUTHeader->Source = ServerMACAddress;
+ FrameOUTHeader->Destination = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};
+ FrameOUTHeader->EtherType = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);
+
+ PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);
+
+ /* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+ FrameOUT.FrameLength = PacketSize;
+ FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = true;
+
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;
+
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are
+ * processed.
+ */
+void TCP_Init(void)
+{
+ /* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */
+ for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+ PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;
+
+ /* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */
+ for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.
+ *
+ * \param Port Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian
+ * \param State New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ * \param Handler Application callback handler for the port
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))
+{
+ /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */
+
+ /* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */
+ for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */
+ if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+ {
+ PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+ PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+ return true;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */
+ if (State == TCP_Port_Open)
+ {
+ for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */
+ if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)
+ {
+ PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port = Port;
+ PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+ PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+ return true;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */
+ return false;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */
+ return true;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.
+ *
+ * \param Port TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian
+ *
+ * \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port)
+{
+ /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */
+
+ for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */
+ if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+ return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;
+ }
+
+ /* Port not in table, assume closed */
+ return TCP_Port_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the
+ * connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.
+ *
+ * \param Port TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian
+ * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected device
+ * \param RemotePort TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ * \param State TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State)
+{
+ /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */
+
+ for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Find port entry in the table */
+ if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+ IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+ {
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
+ return true;
+ }
+ }
+
+ for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Find empty entry in the table */
+ if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)
+ {
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port = Port;
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress;
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort = RemotePort;
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
+ return true;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return false;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.
+ *
+ * \param Port TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ * \param RemotePort Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ * \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+ /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */
+
+ for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Find port entry in the table */
+ if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+ IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+
+ {
+ return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.
+ *
+ * \param Port TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ * \param RemotePort Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ * \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+ /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */
+
+ for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+ {
+ /* Find port entry in the table */
+ if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+ IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+ ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+ {
+ return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return NULL;
+}
+
+/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ * to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.
+ *
+ * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header
+ * \param TCPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's TCP header
+ * \param TCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header
+ *
+ * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ * response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ * next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+ IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+ TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;
+ TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+ TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;
+
+ DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);
+
+ bool PacketResponse = false;
+
+ /* Check if the destination port is open and allows incomming connections */
+ if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)
+ {
+ /* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */
+ if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);
+
+ /* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */
+ if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)
+ {
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+ PacketResponse = true;
+
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Process the incomming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */
+ switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))
+ {
+ case TCP_Connection_Listen:
+ if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+ {
+ /* SYN connection when closed starts a connection with a peer */
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+ PacketResponse = true;
+
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort,
+ TCP_Connection_SYNReceived);
+
+ ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;
+ ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:
+ if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+ {
+ /* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */
+
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);
+
+ ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case TCP_Connection_Established:
+ if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+ {
+ /* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+ PacketResponse = true;
+
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);
+
+ ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+ }
+ else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))
+ {
+ ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+ /* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */
+ if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))
+ {
+ ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;
+ ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = true;
+ ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length = 0;
+ }
+
+ /* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */
+ if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&
+ (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))
+ {
+ uint16_t IPOffset = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+ uint16_t TCPOffset = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+ uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);
+
+ /* Copy the packet data into the buffer */
+ memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],
+ &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],
+ DataLength);
+
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;
+ ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length += DataLength;
+
+ /* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */
+ if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))
+ {
+ ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+ ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+ PacketResponse = true;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incomming packet */
+ return NO_PROCESS;
+ }
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case TCP_Connection_Closing:
+ ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);
+ PacketResponse = true;
+
+ ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);
+
+ break;
+ case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:
+ if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+ {
+ ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+ PacketResponse = true;
+
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+ }
+ else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+ {
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:
+ if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+ {
+ ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+ PacketResponse = true;
+
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+ ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:
+ if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+ {
+ TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+ PacketResponse = true;
+ }
+
+ /* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */
+ if (PacketResponse)
+ {
+ ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+ TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);
+ TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);
+ TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+ if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))
+ TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+ else
+ TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer = 0;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved = 0;
+
+ TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,
+ IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));
+
+ return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+ }
+
+ return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,
+ * complimented.
+ *
+ * \param TCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header
+ * \param SourceAddress Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ * \param SourceAddress DestinationAddress protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ * \param TCPOutSize Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload
+ *
+ * \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value
+ */
+static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
+ IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize)
+{
+ uint32_t Checksum = 0;
+
+ /* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP psudo-header,
+ complimented */
+
+ Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0];
+ Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1];
+ Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0];
+ Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1];
+ Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);
+ Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);
+
+ for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)
+ Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];
+
+ if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)
+ Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);
+
+ while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+ Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+
+ return ~Checksum;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21254859e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for TCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TCP_H_
+#define _TCP_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <stdbool.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h>
+
+ #include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+ #include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */
+ #define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS 1
+
+ /** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */
+ #define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS 1
+
+ /** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */
+ #define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE 1024
+
+ /** Port number for HTTP transmissions */
+ #define TCP_PORT_HTTP SwapEndian_16(80)
+
+ /** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */
+ #define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN false
+
+ /** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */
+ #define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT true
+
+ /** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */
+ #define TCP_FLAG_CWR (1 << 7)
+
+ /** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */
+ #define TCP_FLAG_ECE (1 << 6)
+
+ /** Urgent TCP flag mask */
+ #define TCP_FLAG_URG (1 << 5)
+
+ /** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */
+ #define TCP_FLAG_ACK (1 << 4)
+
+ /** Data Push TCP flag mask */
+ #define TCP_FLAG_PSH (1 << 3)
+
+ /** Reset TCP flag mask */
+ #define TCP_FLAG_RST (1 << 2)
+
+ /** Synchronize TCP flag mask */
+ #define TCP_FLAG_SYN (1 << 1)
+
+ /** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */
+ #define TCP_FLAG_FIN (1 << 0)
+
+ /** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Application buffer to check
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise
+ */
+ #define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer) (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))
+
+ /** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Application buffer to check
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
+ */
+ #define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \
+ (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))
+
+ /** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Application buffer to check
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
+ */
+ #define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer) Buffer->InUse
+
+ /** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be
+ * performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.
+ *
+ * \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Application buffer to lock
+ */
+ #define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE
+
+ /** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Application buffer to release
+ */
+ #define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE
+
+ /** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Application buffer to send
+ * \param Len Length of data contained in the buffer
+ */
+ #define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len) MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE
+
+ /** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Application buffer to clear
+ */
+ #define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE
+
+ /** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.
+ *
+ * \param Connection Open TCP connection to close
+ */
+ #define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection) MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing; }MACROE
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for possible TCP port states */
+ enum TCP_PortStates_t
+ {
+ TCP_Port_Closed = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+ TCP_Port_Open = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for possible TCP connection states */
+ enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t
+ {
+ TCP_Connection_Listen = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */
+ TCP_Connection_SYNSent = 1, /**< Unused */
+ TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */
+ TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */
+ TCP_Connection_FINWait1 = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+ TCP_Connection_FINWait2 = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */
+ TCP_Connection_CloseWait = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+ TCP_Connection_Closing = 7, /**< Unused */
+ TCP_Connection_LastACK = 8, /**< Unused */
+ TCP_Connection_TimeWait = 9, /**< Unused */
+ TCP_Connection_Closed = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */
+ };
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint16_t Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */
+ uint8_t Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */
+ bool Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */
+ bool Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates
+ * buffer ready to be sent to the host
+ */
+ bool InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */
+ } TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */
+ uint32_t SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */
+ TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */
+ } TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint16_t Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */
+ uint16_t RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */
+ IP_Address_t RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */
+ TCP_ConnectionInfo_t Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */
+ uint8_t State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */
+ } TCP_ConnectionState_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a TCP port state */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint16_t Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */
+ uint8_t State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */
+ void (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,
+ TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */
+ } TCP_PortState_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a TCP packet header */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */
+ uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */
+
+ uint32_t SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */
+ uint32_t AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */
+
+ unsigned int Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */
+ unsigned int DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */
+ uint8_t Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */
+ uint16_t WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaning in reception buffer) */
+
+ uint16_t Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */
+ uint16_t UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */
+ } TCP_Header_t;
+
+ /* Tasks: */
+ TASK(TCP_Task);
+
+ /* External Variables: */
+ TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void TCP_Init(void);
+ bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));
+ uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port);
+ bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State);
+ uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
+ TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
+ int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+ #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)
+ static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
+ IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize);
+ #endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e1f9395b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low
+ * reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.
+ */
+
+#define INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C
+#include "UDP.h"
+
+/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ * to the output Ethernet frame if a subprotocol handler has created a response packet.
+ *
+ * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header
+ * \param UDPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's UDP header
+ * \param UDPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header
+ *
+ * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+ UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;
+ UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;
+
+ int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+ DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);
+
+ /* Check to see if the UDP packet is a DHCP packet */
+ if (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST)
+ {
+ RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,
+ &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],
+ &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);
+ }
+
+ /* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+ if (RetSize > 0)
+ {
+ /* Fill out the response UDP packet header */
+ UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+ UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+ UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+ UDPHeaderOUT->Length = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+
+ /* Return the size of the response so far */
+ return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+ }
+
+ return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60bbe2185 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UDP_H_
+#define _UDP_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+
+ #include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+ #include "Ethernet.h"
+ #include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */
+ #define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67
+
+ /** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */
+ #define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY 68
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a UDP packet header */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */
+ uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */
+ uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */
+ uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */
+ } UDP_Header_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c07f2c8bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This
+ * application will serve up a static HTTP webpage when requested by the host.
+ */
+
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ * given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTPHeader[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+ "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+ "Content-type: text/html\r\n"
+ "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically
+ * broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTPPage[] =
+ "<html>"
+ " <head>"
+ " <title>"
+ " LUFA Webserver Demo"
+ " </title>"
+ " </head>"
+ " <body>"
+ " <h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"
+ " <p>"
+ " Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."
+ " <br /><br />"
+ " <small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php\">http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php</a>.</small>"
+ " <hr />"
+ " <i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING
+ " </p>"
+ " </body>"
+ "</html>";
+
+
+/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application
+ * callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.
+ */
+void Webserver_Init(void)
+{
+ /* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */
+ TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);
+}
+
+/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.
+ *
+ * \param RequestHeader HTTP request made by the host
+ * \param Command HTTP command to compare the request to
+ *
+ * \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command)
+{
+ /* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */
+ return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);
+}
+
+/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request
+ * has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.
+ *
+ * \param ConnectionState Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information
+ * \param Buffer Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer
+ */
+void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer)
+{
+ char* BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;
+ static uint8_t PageBlock = 0;
+
+ /* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */
+ if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))
+ {
+ if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))
+ {
+ PageBlock = 0;
+
+ /* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+ strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTPHeader);
+
+ /* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+ TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+
+ /* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */
+ TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+ }
+ else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))
+ {
+ /* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+ strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTPHeader);
+
+ /* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+ TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+ }
+ else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))
+ {
+ /* Echo the host's query back to the host */
+ TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */
+ TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);
+ }
+ }
+ else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))
+ {
+ uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);
+ uint16_t Length;
+
+ /* Determine the length of the loaded block */
+ Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength);
+
+ /* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */
+ strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);
+
+ /* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+ TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);
+
+ /* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */
+ if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))
+ {
+ /* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */
+ TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+
+ /* Close the connection to the host */
+ TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+ }
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2193ad1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h>
+
+ #include "TCP.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */
+ #define HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE 128
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void Webserver_Init(void);
+ void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/makefile b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a068a033 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/RNDISEthernet/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,743 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = RNDISEthernet
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ RNDIS.c \
+ Ethernet.c \
+ ProtocolDecoders.c \
+ ICMP.c \
+ TCP.c \
+ UDP.c \
+ DHCP.c \
+ ARP.c \
+ IP.c \
+ Webserver.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03d4ed9e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ * the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ * process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device},
+
+ USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ Endpoint0Size: 8,
+
+ VendorID: 0x03EB,
+ ProductID: 0x2044,
+ ReleaseNumber: 0x0000,
+
+ ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01,
+ ProductStrIndex: 0x02,
+ SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ NumberOfConfigurations: 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+ Config:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+ TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+ TotalInterfaces: 2,
+
+ ConfigurationNumber: 1,
+ ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+ ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+ MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+ },
+
+ CCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 0,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 1,
+
+ Class: 0x02,
+ SubClass: 0x02,
+ Protocol: 0x01,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_IntHeader:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x00,
+
+ Data: {0x01, 0x10}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_CallManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x01,
+
+ Data: {0x03, 0x01}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x02,
+
+ Data: {0x06}
+ },
+
+ CDC_Functional_Union:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24},
+ SubType: 0x06,
+
+ Data: {0x00, 0x01}
+ },
+
+ ManagementEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF
+ },
+
+ DCI_Interface:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface},
+
+ InterfaceNumber: 1,
+ AlternateSetting: 0,
+
+ TotalEndpoints: 2,
+
+ Class: 0x0A,
+ SubClass: 0x00,
+ Protocol: 0x00,
+
+ InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR
+ },
+
+ DataOutEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ },
+
+ DataInEndpoint:
+ {
+ Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+ EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+ Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ PollingIntervalMS: 0x00
+ }
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ * Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+ Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String},
+
+ UnicodeString: L"LUFA USB-RS232 Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h
+ * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ * USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+ const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+ const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+ void* Address = NULL;
+ uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+ switch (DescriptorType)
+ {
+ case DTYPE_Device:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_Configuration:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor);
+ Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+ break;
+ case DTYPE_String:
+ switch (DescriptorNumber)
+ {
+ case 0x00:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x01:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ case 0x02:
+ Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString);
+ Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+
+ *DescriptorAddress = Address;
+ return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bec5e40d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+ * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+ * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+ * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly.
+ *
+ * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload
+ */
+ #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \
+ struct \
+ { \
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \
+ uint8_t SubType; \
+ uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \
+ }
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 2
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 3
+
+ /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 4
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+ #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8
+
+ /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+ #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+ * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+ * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+ CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint;
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint;
+ } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+ ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1eb8c5432 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd9c8bf14 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA USB to Serial Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%COMPANY%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME% = ManufName
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[ManufName]
+%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; Windows 2000/XP Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[Modem3.nt]
+CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg
+
+[USBModemCopyFileSection]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[Modem3.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[Modem3.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService
+
+[DriverService]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[Strings]
+COMPANY="LUFA Library"
+MFGNAME="Dean Camera"
+Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port"
+SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1f477f17a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+#include "RingBuff.h"
+
+void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buffer)
+{
+ BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+ {
+ Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+ Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+ Buffer->Elements = 0;
+ }
+}
+
+void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data)
+{
+ BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+ {
+ #if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD)
+ if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+ {
+ Buffer->OutPtr++;
+
+ if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+ Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ Buffer->Elements++;
+ }
+ #elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW)
+ if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH)
+ return;
+
+ Buffer->Elements++;
+ #elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)
+ Buffer->Elements++;
+ #endif
+
+ *(Buffer->InPtr) = Data;
+ Buffer->InPtr++;
+
+ if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+ Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+ }
+}
+
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer)
+{
+ RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+
+ BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+ {
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+ if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+ return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+ #error No empty buffer check behaviour specified.
+#endif
+
+ BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+
+ Buffer->OutPtr++;
+ Buffer->Elements--;
+
+ if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH])
+ Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer;
+ }
+
+ return BuffData;
+}
+
+#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer)
+{
+ RingBuff_Data_t BuffData;
+
+ BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+ {
+#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO)
+ if (!(Buffer->Elements))
+ return 0;
+#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK)
+ #error No empty buffer check behaviour specified.
+#endif
+
+ BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr);
+ }
+
+ return BuffData;
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b6bfde66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/* Buffer Configuration: */
+ /* Buffer length - select static size of created ringbuffers: */
+ #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128 // Set to the static ringbuffer size for all ringbuffers (place size after define)
+
+ /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */
+ #define BUFF_VOLATILE // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access
+
+ /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */
+ #define BUFF_DROPOLD // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full
+ // #define BUFF_DROPNEW // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full
+ // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user!
+
+ /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ringbuffer: */
+ //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ringbuffer is read
+ #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ringbuffers - checking left to user!
+
+ /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */
+ #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer
+
+ /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */
+ //#define BUFF_USEPEEK
+
+#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_
+#define _RINGBUFF_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/interrupt.h>
+ #include <util/atomic.h>
+ #include <limits.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+ /* Defines and checks: */
+ #if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE)
+ #define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE
+ #else
+ #error No buffer length specified!
+ #endif
+
+ #if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK))
+ #error No buffer drop mode specified.
+ #endif
+
+ #if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE)
+ #error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified.
+ #endif
+
+ #if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE)
+ #define BUFF_MODE volatile
+ #define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE)
+ #else
+ #define BUFF_MODE
+ #define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK
+ #endif
+
+ #if (BUFF_STATICSIZE > LONG_MAX)
+ #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t
+ #elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX)
+ #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t
+ #elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX)
+ #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t
+ #else
+ #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t
+ #endif
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t;
+
+ typedef BUFF_MODE struct
+ {
+ RingBuff_Data_t Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH];
+ RingBuff_Data_t* InPtr;
+ RingBuff_Data_t* OutPtr;
+ RingBuff_Elements_t Elements;
+ } RingBuff_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buff);
+ void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data);
+ RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer);
+ #if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK)
+ RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer);
+ #endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2db4f97be --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +<AVRStudio><MANAGEMENT><ProjectName>USBtoSerial</ProjectName><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:18:39</Created><LastEdit>30-Sep-2008 14:18:52</LastEdit><ICON>241</ICON><ProjectType>0</ProjectType><Created>30-Sep-2008 14:18:39</Created><Version>4</Version><Build>4, 14, 0, 589</Build><ProjectTypeName>AVR GCC</ProjectTypeName></MANAGEMENT><CODE_CREATION><ObjectFile></ObjectFile><EntryFile></EntryFile><SaveFolder>C:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\USBtoSerial\</SaveFolder></CODE_CREATION><DEBUG_TARGET><CURRENT_TARGET></CURRENT_TARGET><CURRENT_PART></CURRENT_PART><BREAKPOINTS></BREAKPOINTS><IO_EXPAND><HIDE>false</HIDE></IO_EXPAND><REGISTERNAMES><Register>R00</Register><Register>R01</Register><Register>R02</Register><Register>R03</Register><Register>R04</Register><Register>R05</Register><Register>R06</Register><Register>R07</Register><Register>R08</Register><Register>R09</Register><Register>R10</Register><Register>R11</Register><Register>R12</Register><Register>R13</Register><Register>R14</Register><Register>R15</Register><Register>R16</Register><Register>R17</Register><Register>R18</Register><Register>R19</Register><Register>R20</Register><Register>R21</Register><Register>R22</Register><Register>R23</Register><Register>R24</Register><Register>R25</Register><Register>R26</Register><Register>R27</Register><Register>R28</Register><Register>R29</Register><Register>R30</Register><Register>R31</Register></REGISTERNAMES><COM>Auto</COM><COMType>0</COMType><WATCHNUM>0</WATCHNUM><WATCHNAMES><Pane0></Pane0><Pane1></Pane1><Pane2></Pane2><Pane3></Pane3></WATCHNAMES><BreakOnTrcaeFull>0</BreakOnTrcaeFull></DEBUG_TARGET><Debugger><Triggers></Triggers></Debugger><AVRGCCPLUGIN><FILES><SOURCEFILE>Descriptors.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>RingBuff.c</SOURCEFILE><SOURCEFILE>USBtoSerial.c</SOURCEFILE><HEADERFILE>Descriptors.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>RingBuff.h</HEADERFILE><HEADERFILE>USBtoSerial.h</HEADERFILE><OTHERFILE>makefile</OTHERFILE></FILES><CONFIGS><CONFIG><NAME>default</NAME><USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE>YES</USESEXTERNALMAKEFILE><EXTERNALMAKEFILE>makefile</EXTERNALMAKEFILE><PART>atmega128</PART><HEX>1</HEX><LIST>1</LIST><MAP>1</MAP><OUTPUTFILENAME>USBtoSerial.elf</OUTPUTFILENAME><OUTPUTDIR>default\</OUTPUTDIR><ISDIRTY>1</ISDIRTY><OPTIONS/><INCDIRS/><LIBDIRS/><LIBS/><LINKOBJECTS/><OPTIONSFORALL>-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enums</OPTIONSFORALL><LINKEROPTIONS></LINKEROPTIONS><SEGMENTS/></CONFIG></CONFIGS><LASTCONFIG>default</LASTCONFIG><USES_WINAVR>1</USES_WINAVR><GCC_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exe</GCC_LOC><MAKE_LOC>C:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe</MAKE_LOC></AVRGCCPLUGIN><IOView><usergroups/><sort sorted="0" column="0" ordername="0" orderaddress="0" ordergroup="0"/></IOView><Files></Files><Events><Bookmarks></Bookmarks></Events><Trace><Filters></Filters></Trace></AVRStudio>
diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7c9e4b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c @@ -0,0 +1,399 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+#include "USBtoSerial.h"
+
+/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */
+BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA USB RS232 App");
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__);
+BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING);
+
+/* Scheduler Task List */
+TASK_LIST
+{
+ { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+ { Task: CDC_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP },
+};
+
+/* Globals: */
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port.
+ *
+ * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, and the physical USART should be reconfigured to match the
+ * new settings each time they are changed by the host.
+ */
+CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600,
+ CharFormat: OneStopBit,
+ ParityType: Parity_None,
+ DataBits: 8 };
+
+/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the RX data - data from the host to the attached device on the serial port. */
+RingBuff_t Rx_Buffer;
+
+/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the TX data - data from the attached device on the serial port to the host. */
+RingBuff_t Tx_Buffer;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently transmitting data from the Rx_Buffer circular buffer. */
+volatile bool Transmitting = false;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ LEDs_Init();
+ ReconfigureUSART();
+
+ /* Ringbuffer Initialization */
+ Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer);
+ Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+
+ /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */
+ Scheduler_Init();
+
+ /* Initialize USB Subsystem */
+ USB_Init();
+
+ /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */
+ Scheduler_Start();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect)
+{
+ /* Start USB management task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN);
+
+ /* Indicate USB enumerating */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect)
+{
+ /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_STOP);
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP);
+
+ /* Reset Tx and Rx buffers, device disconnected */
+ Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer);
+ Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer);
+
+ /* Indicate USB not ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged)
+{
+ /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK,
+ ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+ ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ /* Indicate USB connected and ready */
+ UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady);
+
+ /* Start CDC task */
+ Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_RUN);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific
+ * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands,
+ * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application.
+ */
+EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket)
+{
+ uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding;
+
+ /* Process CDC specific control requests */
+ switch (bRequest)
+ {
+ case REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+ Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+ Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding));
+
+ /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+
+ /* Reconfigure the USART with the new settings */
+ ReconfigureUSART();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ case REQ_SetControlLineState:
+ if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+ {
+#if 0
+ /* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake
+ lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter, and can be masked against the CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks
+ to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code:
+ */
+
+ uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE();
+
+ // Do something with the given line states in wIndex
+#endif
+
+ /* Acknowledge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived();
+
+ /* Acknowledge status stage */
+ while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady()));
+ Endpoint_ClearSetupIN();
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Task to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host, from and to the physical USART. */
+TASK(CDC_Task)
+{
+ if (USB_IsConnected)
+ {
+#if 0
+ /* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232
+ handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code:
+ */
+
+ USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t)
+ {
+ NotificationType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ Notification: NOTIF_SerialState,
+ wValue: 0,
+ wIndex: 0,
+ wLength: sizeof(uint16_t),
+ };
+
+ uint16_t LineStateMask;
+
+ // Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host
+
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM);
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification));
+ Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask));
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+#endif
+
+ /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM);
+
+ if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Read the received data endpoint into the transmission buffer */
+ while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+ {
+ /* Wait until the buffer has space for a new character */
+ while (!((BUFF_STATICSIZE - Rx_Buffer.Elements)));
+
+ /* Store each character from the endpoint */
+ Buffer_StoreElement(&Rx_Buffer, Endpoint_Read_Byte());
+ }
+
+ /* Clear the endpoint buffer */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+
+ /* Check if Rx buffer contains data */
+ if (Rx_Buffer.Elements)
+ {
+ /* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle */
+ if (!(Transmitting))
+ {
+ Transmitting = true;
+ Serial_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer));
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+ Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM);
+
+ /* Check if the Tx buffer contains anything to be sent to the host */
+ if (Tx_Buffer.Elements)
+ {
+ /* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+ while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+
+ /* Check before sending the data if the endpoint is completely full */
+ bool IsFull = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE);
+
+ /* Write the transmission buffer contents to the received data endpoint */
+ while (Tx_Buffer.Elements && (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() < CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE))
+ Endpoint_Write_Byte(Buffer_GetElement(&Tx_Buffer));
+
+ /* Send the data */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+
+ /* If a full endpoint was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to terminate the transfer */
+ if (IsFull)
+ {
+ /* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+ while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()));
+
+ /* Send an empty packet to terminate the transfer */
+ Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank();
+ }
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the USART transmit complete interrupt, fired each time the USART has sent a character. This reloads the USART
+ * data register with the next byte from the Rx_Buffer circular buffer if a character is available, or stops the transmission if
+ * the buffer is currently empty.
+ */
+ISR(USART1_TX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+ /* Send next character if available */
+ if (Rx_Buffer.Elements)
+ UDR1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer);
+ else
+ Transmitting = false;
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the USART receive complete interrupt, fired each time the USART has received a character. This stores the received
+ * character into the Tx_Buffer circular buffer for later transmission to the host.
+ */
+ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+ /* Only store received characters if the USB interface is connected */
+ if (USB_IsConnected)
+ {
+ /* Character received, store it into the buffer */
+ Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, UDR1);
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to
+ * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates.
+ *
+ * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t enum
+ */
+void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */
+ switch (CurrentStatus)
+ {
+ case Status_USBNotReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBEnumerating:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+ break;
+ case Status_USBReady:
+ LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Reconfigures the USART to match the current serial port settings issued by the host as closely as possible. */
+void ReconfigureUSART(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
+
+ /* Determine parity - non odd/even parity mode defaults to no parity */
+ if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Odd)
+ ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));
+ else if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Even)
+ ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);
+
+ /* Determine stop bits - 1.5 stop bits is set as 1 stop bit due to hardware limitations */
+ if (LineCoding.CharFormat == TwoStopBits)
+ ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
+
+ /* Determine data size - 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits are supported */
+ if (LineCoding.DataBits == 6)
+ ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
+ else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 7)
+ ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
+ else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 8)
+ ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+
+ /* Enable double speed, gives better error percentages at 8MHz */
+ UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);
+
+ /* Enable transmit and receive modules and interrupts */
+ UCSR1B = ((1 << TXCIE1) | (1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
+
+ /* Set the USART mode to the mask generated by the Line Coding options */
+ UCSR1C = ConfigMask;
+
+ /* Set the USART baud rate register to the desired baud rate value */
+ UBRR1 = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL((uint16_t)LineCoding.BaudRateBPS);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3fb6d7d9f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ +/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for USBtoSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USB_SERIAL_H_
+#define _USB_SERIAL_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <avr/power.h>
+
+ #include "Descriptors.h"
+ #include "RingBuff.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h> // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.h> // USART driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h> // Simple scheduler for task management
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+ #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21
+
+ /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+ #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20
+
+ /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
+ #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22
+
+ /** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for
+ * use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC
+ * notification endpoint.
+ */
+ #define NOTIF_SerialState 0x20
+
+ /** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+ * from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR (1 << 0)
+
+ /** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request
+ * from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS (1 << 1)
+
+ /** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+ * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD (1 << 0)
+
+ /** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+ * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR (1 << 1)
+
+ /** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+ * from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK (1 << 2)
+
+ /** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification
+ * from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING (1 << 3)
+
+ /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+ * to indicate that a framing error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR (1 << 4)
+
+ /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+ * to indicate that a parity error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR (1 << 5)
+
+ /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host,
+ * to indicate that a data overrun error has ocurred on the virtual serial port.
+ */
+ #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)
+
+ /* Event Handlers: */
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged);
+
+ /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */
+ HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket);
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration
+ * as set by the host via a class specific request.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */
+ uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+ * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum
+ */
+ uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+ * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum
+ */
+ uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */
+ } CDC_Line_Coding_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a
+ * change in the device state asynchronously.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants
+ * from the library StdRequestType.h header
+ */
+ uint8_t Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */
+ uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */
+ uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */
+ uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */
+ } USB_Notification_Header_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
+ enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t
+ {
+ OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */
+ OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */
+ TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
+ enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t
+ {
+ Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */
+ Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */
+ };
+
+ /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */
+ enum USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */
+ Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */
+ Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */
+ };
+
+ /* Tasks: */
+ TASK(CDC_Task);
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void ReconfigureUSART(void);
+ void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e33467217 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage USB to Serial Converter Demo (via CDC-ACM class)
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ * This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ * a USB to Serial converter using the CDC class. Sent and
+ * received data on the serial port is communicated to the USB
+ * host.
+ *
+ * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ * project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ * CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ * <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>BUFF_STATICSIZE</td>
+ * <td>RingBuff.h</td>
+ * <td>Defines the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered in each Ring Buffer.</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/makefile b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62939ab60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/USBtoSerial/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,731 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = USBtoSerial
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ Descriptors.c \
+ RingBuff.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Device/makefile b/Demos/Device/makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000..825825f81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Device/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.fourwalledcubicle.com +# + +# Makefile to build all the LUFA Device Demos. Call with "make all" to +# rebuild all Device demos. + +# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any +# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled +# code. + +all: + make -C AudioInput clean + make -C AudioInput all + + make -C AudioOutput clean + make -C AudioOutput all + + make -C CDC clean + make -C CDC all + + make -C DualCDC clean + make -C DualCDC all + + make -C Joystick clean + make -C Joystick all + + make -C Keyboard clean + make -C Keyboard all + + make -C KeyboardMouse clean + make -C KeyboardMouse all + + make -C MassStorage clean + make -C MassStorage all + + make -C MIDI clean + make -C MIDI all + + make -C Mouse clean + make -C Mouse all + + make -C RNDISEthernet clean + make -C RNDISEthernet all + + make -C USBtoSerial clean + make -C USBtoSerial all + +%: + make -C AudioInput $@ + make -C AudioOutput $@ + make -C CDC $@ + make -C DualCDC $@ + make -C Joystick $@ + make -C Keyboard $@ + make -C KeyboardMouse $@ + make -C MassStorage $@ + make -C MIDI $@ + make -C Mouse $@ + make -C RNDISEthernet $@ + make -C USBtoSerial $@ |